JP2019107507A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game by utilizing music.SOLUTION: A game machine includes sound output control means for controlling output of sound from sound output means. The sound output control means includes first means for performing control so as to output predetermined music from the audio output means when performance execution means executes a predetermined performance. The first means maintains a melody performed in predetermined music when a predetermined performance is in a first state, and performs control for increasing a sound part played in the predetermined music.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 28

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, various effect images such as fluctuation effects (dynamic display of identification information) are displayed on display means such as liquid crystal display devices to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1). The fluctuation effect is an effect started when the ball enters the ball entrance (starting opening) (start winning combination), and, for example, three or 3 × 3 grids horizontally or vertically in the effective display area A total of nine symbols etc. are displayed, and the symbols etc. displayed are scrolled based on predetermined game conditions, and when the scroll is stopped, the stop symbols become a predetermined combination at the predetermined stop position. In the case where there is a hit. While such an effect is being performed, the game machine outputs various music.

JP 2001-046635 A

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, there was a circumstance that the music did not contribute so much to the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game by using music.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises a main control means for performing main control of the game, a sub control means operating based on a signal transmitted from the main control means, and its sub control It comprises: an effect executing means for executing an effect based on the progress of the game based on the control by the means; and a voice output means for outputting a voice based on the control by the sub control means, the sub control The means includes audio output control means for controlling the output of the audio from the audio output means, and the audio output control means is configured to output the predetermined music when the predetermined effect is executed by the effect execution means. A first means for controlling to output from the output means is provided, and the first means maintains the melody played by the predetermined music when the predetermined effect is in the first state. Played with the music of It performs control of increasing the part.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the voice output control means includes storage means for storing voice data for outputting voice from the voice output means, and the storage means includes The voice data to be stored is voice data for outputting the predetermined music from the voice output means, first data for reproducing the first part of the predetermined music, and second data of the predetermined music. The first means includes at least the first data and the second data in response to the start of execution of the predetermined effect by the effect execution means. Reproduction start means for starting reproduction of the first part and the second part of the predetermined music based on data, and an output of the second part whose reproduction is started by the reproduction start means Comprising a muting means for muting, as triggered by the predetermined effect becomes the first state, and unmute means outputted by said muting means releases the mute muted the second part, the.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, main control of the game is executed by the main control means. Under the control of the sub control means operating based on the signal transmitted from the main control means, the effect executing means executes the effect based on the progress of the game. Further, under the control of the audio output control means provided in the sub control means, the audio is outputted from the audio output means. Here, when the predetermined effect is executed by the effect execution means, the predetermined music is outputted from the sound output means under the control of the first means of the sound output control means. Then, when the predetermined effect is in the first state, the control by the first means is performed so that the part of the sound played with the predetermined music increases while the melody played with the predetermined music is maintained. To be done. This makes it possible to energize predetermined music without interrupting the continuity of predetermined music, so that the player feels the excitement of the predetermined effect without interrupting the player's feelings by the predetermined music. It can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved by using the music.

According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, the music output control means stores voice data for outputting voice from the voice output means. In the voice storage means, as voice data for outputting the predetermined music from the voice output means, the first data for reproducing the first part of the predetermined music and the second part of the predetermined music are reproduced. And at least two data. Then, when the execution of the predetermined effect by the effect execution means is started, the first of the predetermined music is triggered based on that at least based on the first data and the second data stored in the storage means. The reproduction of the part and the second part is started by the reproduction start means. On the other hand, the output of the second part whose reproduction is started by the reproduction start means is muted by the mute means. Then, in response to the predetermined effect being in the first state, the muting of the second part is canceled by the mute canceling means. Thus, when the predetermined effect is executed by the effect executing means, the reproduction of the first part and the second part of the predetermined music is started based on at least the first data and the second data. However, initially, the output of the second part is muted, and the first part is output from the audio output means. Then, when the predetermined effect is in the first state, the muting of the second part is released, and the first part and the second part are simultaneously output as the predetermined music. Thereby, when the predetermined effect is in the first state, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the part of the sound played with the predetermined music without interruption of the continuity of the predetermined music.
The first part may be composed of one part or may be composed of a plurality of parts. Similarly, the second part may be configured by one part or may be configured by a plurality of parts.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically area | region division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is a figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the jackpot random number table, (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the jackpot type table, (c) is a schematic diagram for the jackpot variation pattern table (D) is a schematic view schematically showing the outlier (ordinary) fluctuation pattern table, and (e) is schematically outlier (probable change) fluctuation pattern table It is a schematic diagram shown. It is the model which showed typically the various data stored in audio | speech data ROM in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing a first pattern normal BGM pattern table, (b) is a schematic view schematically showing a fifth pattern normal BGM pattern table, (c) ) Is a schematic view schematically showing a tenth pattern normal BGM pattern table. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the model which showed typically an example of the display data table for fluctuation. It is the model which showed an example of the additional data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation indication processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment. It is the flowchart which showed the display command determination processing performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of sound edit process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of sound edit process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the timing chart which showed the output timing of BGM for reach when a special reach is performed through a normal reach and a super reach. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is a flow chart showing pending ball number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flow chart showing decision command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device is there. (A) is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is the flowchart which showed a part of display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the model which showed typically the various data stored in audio | speech data ROM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed a part of sound edit process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the timing chart which showed the output timing of BGM for reach when a special reach is performed through a normal reach and a super reach. It is the flowchart which showed a part of sound edit process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the timing chart which showed the output timing of BGM for reach when a special reach is performed through a normal reach and a super reach.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 38, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. Balls are played by balls flowing down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is provided so as to be operable by the player, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) provided substantially at the center of the game board 13 to the player It is used, for example, when the player is prompted to operate the frame button 22 during the effect, and the content of the effect to be executed is changed according to the operating condition of the frame button 22 or the like.

  The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and the line is accompanied by the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning combination) described later. The various effects such as the variable effect and the reach effect are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. For example, a "town stage" with a motif in the town, a "sea stage" with a motif in the sea, a "mountain stage" with a motif in a mountain, etc. are prepared as stages. The change of the stage is performed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the change effect is not performed or during high-speed change.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. For example, on the periphery of the window portion 14c, electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs are provided. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the right side below the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and the sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) And the like is affixed to the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the small window 35. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information.

  The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player for driving a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed, and on the left side of the lower plate 50, an ashtray 53 is attached.

  A touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a is provided inside the operation handle 51, a push button type strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and the operation handle 51 And a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotational operation of the lens by changing the electric resistance. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is then driven to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "two-and-a-box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, a windmill and rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, a first The ball entrance (starting opening) 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and a wood screw from the front side of the game board 13 It is fixed by etc. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by dividing two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 into a substantially circular area (a winning opening etc. is disposed, and a shot ball is (Flowing down area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, at the upper right side upper part (right upper part of FIG. 2) of the game area. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. A plurality of LEDs 37a perform fluctuation display by indicating whether or not they are in the process of being fluctuated along with the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 (start winning), or stop symbols after the end of fluctuation The symbol according to the result of the lottery that is performed for the starting winning combination is shown by the lighting state, or of the balls entered into the first ball entrance 64, of the balls (retention balls) of which the fluctuation has not been executed The number of holding balls, which is a number, is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds in the jackpot and an error display. The LEDs 37a are configured such that the light emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the light emission colors can indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

  In this pachinko machine 10, in a lottery performed for entering the first ball entrance 64, in addition to making a pass / fail determination of whether or not a big hit, when it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the big hit type . As jackpot types determined here, 15R probability variation jackpots, 2R probability variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change, and if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown.

  Here, “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 round jackpots, and “2R probability variation jackpot” is a maximum number of rounds jackpot of 2 rounds It is a probability change jackpot to shift to a high probability state after. Also, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots and for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation times) becomes a short time state .

  Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (probability change state, probability change), in other words, transition to a special gaming state It is a state of easy playing. In the high probability state in the present embodiment, the probability of hitting the second symbol (normal symbol) to be described later is increased, and the motorized prize attached to the first ball entrance 64 is more likely to be released. The state of the game in which the ball is likely to enter the ball 64 is included.

  On the other hand, the "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability is not in a definite state, and means a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability state. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the hitting probability of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) increases with the jackpot probability unchanged. It is a gaming state in which a ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64 by the motorized prize associated with the first ball entrance 64 being more easily released.

  In addition, according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10, instead of changing the probability of hitting the second symbol, the time when the electric role associated with the first ball entry 64 opens or the hitting in the second symbol The number of times the motorized role opens may be changed. For example, in the low probability state or the high probability state, the open time of the motorized accessory attached to the first entrance 64 may be longer than that in the other gaming states. Further, the time saving state or the high probability state of the low probability state may be a state in which the number of times of opening the motorized combination per one time in the second symbol is larger than that of the other gaming states.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is a liquid crystal display that performs the fluctuation display of the third symbol while synchronizing with the fluctuation display in the first symbol display device 37 by using the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination) as a trigger. The third symbol display device 81 configured by (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”), and the LED that variably displays the second symbol (ordinary symbol) triggered by the passage of the ball of the second ball entrance 67 The second symbol display device 83 is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIGS. 5 and 10) described later, for example, the left, middle And three right symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, while the display of the gaming state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 displays the display of the first symbol display device 37. The display is decorative according to the Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a view schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten main symbols attached with the numbers "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, and the main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is The front of the wooden box is almost fully filled with large numbers. On the other hand, the main symbol with an even number (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached symbol imitating a character such as a furoshiki or helmet, which is almost full on the front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 (refer to FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, the third symbol display device 81 changes the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned. And the jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. In the case of shifting to a high probability state (probability state) after the end of the jackpot, variable display is performed in which the main symbols ("high probability pattern", "probability pattern") to which the odd number is added are aligned. On the other hand, when transitioning to the low probability state after the big hit ends, the variable display in which the main symbols ("low probability symbol", "normal symbol") to which the even number is added is aligned.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into two vertically, and the lower 2/3 is a main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, and others The upper one-third of the upper display area is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of holding balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, and the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed on the upper, middle, and lower three stages for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 at each game. Is displayed. A large hit moving image is displayed as a big hit if it is aligned with a combination of big hit symbols (in this embodiment, the same main symbol combination) on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of holding balls which is the number of balls (holding balls) for which the change has not been executed among the balls entered into the first entrance 64, and the small area Ds2 And Ds3 is an area | region which displays an advance presentation effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, and it is suggested to the player that the state is more likely to shift to a jackpot than usual. In the central small area Ds2, usually, a predetermined character (a boy with a hachimaki in this embodiment) performs a predetermined movement, sometimes performs a special movement other than the predetermined movement, or another character appears. A notice effect is given by, for example, putting it out.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as one aspect of the fluctuation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 along with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), one fluctuation display Among them, the so-called "pseudo reunion" can be performed in which the pseudo variation of the third symbol is performed a plurality of times consecutively. The "pseudo ream" is a kind of preview effect that suggests an expectation of becoming a big hit as a result of the fluctuation display in which the pseudo ream is executed, and during one fluctuation display, the pseudo stop and re-variation of the third symbol ( The fluctuation representation is performed in a mode in which the pseudo fluctuation is performed one or more times.

  In “pseudo-link”, the larger the number of repetitions of pseudo stop and re-variation (that is, the number of times the pseudo-variation is continuously performed) performed during the one fluctuation display, the jackpot is given after the fluctuation display The number of repetitions is determined so as to increase the sense of expectation. As a result, the more the simulated change is repeatedly performed during the one change display, the more the player can feel the possibility of becoming a big hit. Therefore, by performing the fluctuation representation by the “pseudo chain”, it is possible to increase the interest to the player for the game.

  If the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed by the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display device 37), the number of times of ball entry is suspended up to four times The number of holding balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one holding ball number symbol is displayed per one holding ball number ball, and the number of holding balls is displayed according to the display number of the holding ball number symbol. That is, when one holding ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the holding ball number is one ball, and when four holding ball number symbols are displayed, the holding ball number is Indicates 4 balls. In addition, when the number-of-parked-balls design is not displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of balls-held is 0, that is, there is no ball-held.

  In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first entry slot 64 is configured to be suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of balls reserved is not limited to four times, and is three times The number of times may be set to five or more (for example, eight times). In addition, instead of the display of the number-of-hold ball number symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of number-of-hold balls is divided by a number into a part of the third symbol display device 81 or (For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls held may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80, the game board 13, or the front frame 12 etc. are provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, for the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state. May be displayed.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the explanation will be continued. The second entrance slot 67 is a through gate for passing the ball and discharging it to the game area when the ball flowing down the game area enters, and one for the right side and the left side of the variable display unit 80 Are provided one by one. The second entrance port 67 is provided with a second entrance port switch (not shown) for detecting a ball that has passed through the second entrance port 67.

  The second symbol display device 83 is used as a display symbol (also referred to as "second symbol" or "normal symbol") each time it detects that a ball has passed through the second entry port 67 by the second entry port switch. The variation display is performed to alternately light the symbol of "o" and the symbol of "x". In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o"), the motorized combination provided at the first ball inlet 64 has a predetermined time It is configured to be activated (opened) only. The number of times of passage of the second ball entrance 67 is suspended up to four times, and the number of balls retained is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed in the second symbol retention lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, as the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol It may be performed using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, the number of holding balls passing through the second entrance 67 may be notified by a part of the third symbol display device 81 instead of lighting the second symbol holding lamp 84. In addition, the passage of the second ball entry port 67 is not limited to 4 times the maximum number of holding balls, similarly to the first ball entry port 64, not more than 3 times, or 5 times or more (for example, , 8 times) may be set. Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be configured not to perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port (starting winning opening) 64 to which a ball can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 makes a lottery for a big hit, and the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is started (started). Then, after the predetermined fluctuation time has passed, the fluctuation display is stopped, and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol according to the lottery result is the third symbol display The stop display is made on the effective line L1 of the device 81. In addition, the first ball entry port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls enter.

  The first ball entry port 64 is accompanied by a motorized part so as to close the entrance of the ball. In a normal state, the motorized product is in an inoperative state, and the entrance of the first ball inlet 64 is in a closed state (contracted state) in which the entrance is closed. When the motorized part is in the closed state (reduced state), the ball can not enter the first ball entrance 64 or the ball can not enter the ball in a difficult manner. Therefore, in this case, the variation display (variation effect) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 does not occur or hardly occurs.

  As a result of the fluctuation display of the second symbol (normal symbol) in the second symbol display device 83 executed along with the passage of the ball to the second ball entrance 67, when the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed, the second symbol (1) The motorized accessory attached to the ball entrance 64 is in an operating state, and the entrance of the first ball entrance 64 is in an open state (enlarged state) in which the entrance is opened. When the motorized part is in the open state (enlarged state), the ball can enter the first ball entry port 64 or the motorized part is in the closed state (reduced state), It becomes easy to enter the ball. Therefore, in this case, the variation display (variation effect) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is likely to occur.

  Below the first ball entrance 64, a variable winning device 65 is disposed, and at a substantially central portion thereof, a horizontally-long rectangular specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery with the main control device 110 is a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a big hit stop symbol after a predetermined time (variation time) has passed. A stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. After that, the gaming state transitions to the special gaming state (big hit), and the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds pass or 10 balls are won). Ru.

  The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward about the lower side of the opening / closing plate. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is lit in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning A game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time for a predetermined number of times as a special gaming state is triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

  In the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate, an identification label and the like are provided, and the certificate paper and the like affixed to the adhesive space K1 is a front frame 14 Can be viewed through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball which has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided to an unshown ball discharge path through the out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is constituted by an 8-bit microcomputer, and the ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and various data etc. temporarily when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A RAM 203, which is a memory for storing, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The main control unit 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83. The ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202c, and a deviation fluctuation pattern table 202d as fixed value data used to control these processes. In addition, in the RAM 203, main processes of the pachinko machine 10 (large win lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display result in the second symbol display device 83, etc.) are controlled. There are various counters to do this.

  Here, various counters provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 and various tables 202 a to 202 d stored in the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. First, FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters.

  For the setting of the display of the big hit lottery and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the big hit lottery, and the first hit type counter C2 used for selecting the big hit symbol A stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set an initial value of the first random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select a fluctuation pattern are used. The second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time updating is performed, and the value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) or at an interval of 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 20). Furthermore, some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 20). The updated value of each counter is appropriately stored in a counter buffer 203b set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The counter buffer 203b is an area for storing the updated value of each counter, and the MPU 201 uses the value stored in the counter buffer 203b at the update timing of the counter for each counter. Update the counter.

  The RAM 203 is provided with a holding ball storage area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas). The reserve area is the first hit random number counter C1 read from the counter buffer 203b, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the change type according to the timing of entering the first entry ball slot 64. This area is for temporarily storing (pending) each value of the counter CS1. Also, the execution area is a first hit random number counter C1, a first hit type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3 and a change which are used to determine the change pattern of the big hit lottery or change effect and the stop type at the start timing of change. This area is for storing the type counter CS1.

  When the MPU 201 detects the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), the first random number counter C1 of the counter buffer 203b at that time, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation Each value of the type counter CS1 is stored in one area of the first to fourth areas for holding. At this time, when there is no hold in the hold area and all the first to fourth areas are vacant, the value of each counter is stored in the hold first area. If there is only one hold in the hold area and the value of each counter is stored only in the hold first area, the value of each counter is stored in the hold second area. If there are two reservations in the reservation area and the value of each counter is stored only in the first and second areas for storage, the value of each counter is stored in the third area for reservation. If there are three reservations in the reservation area and the values of the counters are stored only in the first to third areas, the values of the counters are stored in the fourth area.

  Thereby, the values of the respective counters acquired from the counter buffer 203b at the timing of the start winning are stored in the first holding area, the second holding area, the third holding area, and the fourth holding area in the order of the start winning combination. Can. If the start winning combination is detected when the values of the counters are stored in all of the first to fourth areas, the values of the counters at that time are discarded without being held. That is, in the present embodiment, the value of each counter can be held up to at most four start winnings.

  In addition, when the change production start timing comes, the MPU 201 executes the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved first area. It moves to the area, and based on the value of each counter stored in the execution area, the determination of the variation pattern of the variation effect and the type of the stop symbol is performed.

  In addition, after the value of each counter in the first reserve area is moved to the execution area, the value of each counter stored in the second reserve area is shifted to the first reserve area which is free and stored in the third reserve area. The value of each counter is shifted to the reserved second area, and the value of each counter stored in the reserved fourth area is shifted to the reserved third area. As a result, when the variable effect is started based on the value of each counter held in the holding ball storage area 203c, the holding decreases by one, and one area of the holding area is released.

  Each counter will be described in detail. As described above, the first random number counter C1 is a counter for use in a jackpot lottery, and is updated periodically (once in each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment). The update of the first random number counter C1 was sequentially added one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899), and reached the maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 899) It is done by returning to 0 after. In the case where the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution (when an update is periodically performed from an initial value, the initial value is returned to the initial value by the next update), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time Is set as a new initial value in the first random number counter C1, and updating is performed from the initial value.

  As described above, the first initial random number counter CINI1 is used as the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. For example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also configured of a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is not only updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) is executed, but also repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 20).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the counter buffer 203b is stored in the holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. Then, at the start of the change, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the holding ball storage area 203c is the value of the random number (large jack random number; also referred to as a winning value) Perform a jackpot lottery. The value of the jackpot random number (jackpot random number value) is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the holding sphere storage area 203c (precisely, the execution area of the holding sphere storage area 203c If the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the) matches the jackpot random number value set by the jackpot random number table 202a, it is determined that a jackpot has occurred.

  Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 7A. FIG. 7A is a schematic view schematically showing the jackpot random number table 202a. The big hit random number table 202a indicates the value (big hit random number value) of the first hit random number counter C1 determined to be big hit. In the jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot random number value referred to in the low probability state (that is, a period during which the gaming state is not definite) and a jackpot random number value referred to in the gaming state high probability state (that is, positive variation) And the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. As described above, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, the first random number counter C1 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In addition, the number of jackpot random number values that will be jackpots in the low probability state is three, and the values "7, 307, 582" are stored in the jackpot random number table 202a in association with the "low probability state". . On the other hand, the number of jackpot random number values that will be jackpots in the high probability state is 30, the value “28, 58, 85, 122, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, “448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 681, 716, 750, 809, 836, 866, 892” are associated with the “high probability state”, and the jackpot random number table 202a is It is stored.

  The MPU 201 reads out from the jackpot random number table 202a the jackpot random number value that matches the playing state at that time when judging the jackpot. Then, the MPU 201 uses the first hit random number counter C1 (the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203c) used for the big hit determination to read the big hit random number value read from the big hit random number table 202a. It is determined whether or not it matches one of the above, and if it matches, it is determined as a big hit.

  That is, in the case where the gaming state is in the low probability state, the first hit is made when the value of the random number counter C1 matches any one of "7, 307, 582". Since the first random number counter C1 is updated in the range of 0 to 899, the jackpot probability in the case of the low probability state is 1/300. Further, when the gaming state is a high probability state, the value of the first random number counter C1 is “28, 58, 85, 122, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420, A jackpot occurs when it matches any one of “448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892”. Therefore, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/30.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot random number value read out from the jackpot random number table 202a in the low probability state and the jackpot random number value read out from the jackpot random number table 202a in the high probability state do not have overlapping values. The jackpot random number value is set. Here, if there is a value that is always used as the jackpot random number value regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, the value may be input from the outside, and it is likely that the jackpot may be improperly attracted. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state), changing the value of the random number to be the big hit Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the value of the random number, it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description of the various counters provided in the RAM 203 will be continued. The first collision type counter C2 is for determining the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (for example, 0 to 99) In the case of a counter that can take a value, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing) and at the timing when the ball wins at the first entrance 64 (start winning), The first hit random number counter C1 is stored in any one of the first to fourth reserved areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the 1 reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203c is not a large random number, that is, if it is a random number falling out, the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect Or, the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") is the one at the time of removal. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the 1 reserve area in the reserve sphere storage area 203c is a random number that makes a big win, the variation pattern and the stop type in the variation effect become the one at the big win . In this case, the variation pattern at the big hit and the stop type are determined corresponding to the big hit type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

  The value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type counter C 2 and the jackpot type table 202 b stored in the ROM 202.

  Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 7 (b). FIG. 7B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 7B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot type is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  As the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds transitions to a high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot “15R probability variation jackpot”, the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot and 100 During the number of times of fluctuation, there are "15R normal jackpots" that are short-lived, and there are "2R probability variation jackpots" in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a high probability state after two rounds of jackpots.

  In the jackpot type table 202b, each jackpot type is associated with the value of a first hit type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 7 (b), the value "0 to 39" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variation jackpot, and the value "40 ... 79 "is associated, and the value" 80 to 99 "of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability variation jackpot.

  When the value of the first random number counter C1 is a value that makes a big hit, the big hit type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the big hit type table 202b . For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20", "15R probability variation big hit" is determined as the big hit type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "60", the big hit type is "20" If the 15R normal jackpot is determined, and the value of the first collision type counter C2 is "90", the "2R probability variation jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected with a probability of 40% when the jackpot is achieved, the 15R regular jackpot is selected with the probability of 40 percent, and the 2R probability variation jackpot is selected with the probability of 20%. . The probability that each jackpot type is selected when it is a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table 202b.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the explanation of the various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is for determining the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") in the case of becoming out of position, for example, one by one is sequentially added within the range of 0 to 99, and the maximum value ( In other words, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As the type of stop selected in this embodiment, after reach occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol and stops, and after the same reach occurs, the final stop symbol There are three stop (rendering) patterns: "reach other than out of front and back" where "stops" except before and after reach symbol and "complete out" where reach does not occur.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), and at a timing when the ball wins at the first ball entry port 64 (start winning), The random number counter C1 and the first collision type counter C2 are stored in any one of the first to fourth reserved areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the 1 holding area in the holding ball storage area 203c is not a random number that makes a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that becomes out, the stop type in the fluctuation effect Will be at the time of departure. In this case, the type of stop at the time of removal is determined based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area.

  In the present embodiment, the ROM 202 is provided with a plurality of tables (not shown) having different ranges of random numbers for which the stop type is selected, corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high probability state or the low probability state.

  For example, in a high probability state, a table with a wide range of random values from 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" is selected so that reach effects are not selected more than necessary because jackpots are easily generated. It becomes easy to be selected as "complete removal". In this table, the range of random numbers corresponding to 98, 99 for “front and back out of reach”, 90 to 97 for “front and back out of reach”, “front and back out of reach” and “reach other than for back and forth out” is narrow It becomes difficult to select out-of-reach and out-of-front reach.

  In the low probability state, a table with a narrow range of random numbers from 0 to 79 corresponding to the stop type of “completely out” is selected to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first entrance 64. And it becomes difficult to select "completely out". In this table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than back and forth deviation" is wide as 80 to 97, and "reach other than back and forth deviation" is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach display with a long rendering time, so it is possible to secure the ball entering time of the ball to the first ball entrance 64 and the fluctuation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter table, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of “back and forth reach” is set to 98, 99.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is a loop counter for use in determining the fluctuation pattern, and for example, is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). There is. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once every four milliseconds in the main processing described later (see FIG. 20), and is also repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main processing.

  The variation type counter CS1 of the counter buffer 203b, together with the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2 and the stop pattern selection counter C3, at the timing when the ball wins at the first entrance 64 (start winning). It is stored in any one of the first to fourth areas reserved in the reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. Then, at the start of the change, the value of the change type counter CS1 transferred from the reserve first area of the reserve ball storage area 203c to the execution area and the change pattern table stored in the ROM 202 should be referred to Determine the fluctuation pattern. The fluctuation pattern determined here is the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation.

  That is, in the main control device 110, only the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation is determined as the fluctuation pattern. The specific variation mode is set by the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. 3rd symbol display device out of the fluctuation modes in which the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 can perform fluctuation display in the fluctuation time based on the fluctuation pattern (variation time) determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1 The details of the variation pattern of the third symbol displayed at 81 are determined. Then, in accordance with the determined variation mode, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to variably display the third symbol, and the sound lamp control device 113 causes the sound output from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the variation display. While making it output, the lamp | ramp of the lamp display apparatus 227 (electric decoration parts 29-33) is made to light-up and blink-display.

  As described above, in the main controller 110, only the fluctuation time is determined as the process of determining the fluctuation pattern, and the details of the fluctuation mode according to the fluctuation time are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. decide. The MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is configured by an 8-bit microcomputer and can not perform complicated processing, but when the change pattern is determined, the main control unit 110 is configured to determine only the change time. As compared with the case where the detail of the variation mode is determined by the main controller 110, the process of determining the variation pattern of the main controller 110 can be performed easily.

  Further, when the details of the variation mode are determined by the main controller 110, the detailed information of the determined variation mode must be notified to the voice lamp control apparatus 113 etc., and the command necessary for the notification may be There is a risk that it will have to be composed of bytes or more, and sending and receiving of commands may be complicated.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the main controller 110 is configured to determine only the fluctuation time, so if the voice lamp control device 113 or the like is notified of only the information related to the determined fluctuation time Well, the configuration of the command related to the notification can be simplified. Therefore, it can be suppressed that the transmission and reception of the command becomes complicated. In addition, even if only the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation is determined in main controller 110, sound lamp control device 113 or display control device 114 determines the fluctuation mode according to the specified fluctuation time among many fluctuation modes. Since the third symbol display device 81 is configured to perform the fluctuation display in the determined fluctuation mode, a variety of fluctuation effects can be given to the player, thereby improving the player's interest be able to.

  Now, in the present embodiment, as a variation pattern table used to determine a variation pattern (variation time) according to the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern table 202c for jackpot used at the time of big hit, and used at the time of deviation A deviation variation pattern table 202d is prepared. Further, as the variation pattern table 202d for deviation, the variation pattern table 202d2 for deviation (probability variation) and according to whether the gaming state is a short time state or a high probability state or a low probability state (but excluding the time short state). An off (ordinary) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 is prepared.

  Here, the details of the various fluctuation patterns will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 (c) to 7 (e). First, FIG. 7C is a view schematically showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern table 202c stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 7C, the jackpot variation pattern table 202c is divided into groups (groups) based on the jackpot type. Specifically, it is divided into 15R jackpot common to be referred to when the jackpot type is 15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot, and 2R probability variation jackpot dedicated to be referred to when 2R probability variation jackpot. The values of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with each of the divided groups.

  When the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is the big-hit random number value at the start of the change, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first per-classification counter C2 stored in the execution area In response, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area is determined from the jackpot fluctuation table 202c.

  In common with the 15R jackpot, there are a fluctuation pattern A with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds, a fluctuation B with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds, and a fluctuation C with a fluctuation time of 90 seconds as fluctuation patterns. As for the correspondence between the fluctuations A to C and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the fluctuation A is 0 to 10, the fluctuation B is 11 to 99, and the fluctuation C is 100 to 198.

  When the change A (30 seconds) is selected as the change pattern, a change effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81 in a mode such as normal reach by control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. When the change B (60 seconds) is selected as the change pattern, a change effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81 in a manner such as super reach by control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. In addition, when the variation C (90 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern, the third symbol display device 81 performs variation representation in a mode such as special reach by control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114.

  Normal reach, after the start of the fluctuation effect, through the high-speed fluctuation (symbol fluctuation that the third symbol is difficult to see visually) in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see Fig. 4), left symbol row Z1 on the effective line L1, right symbol row A reach is established by stopping the same third symbol at Z3, and after that, it is a fluctuation pattern in which the middle symbol row Z2 stops in a short time and the final display is performed.

  The super reach is a variation pattern in which the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed after a long time than the normal reach after the reach is established. The super reach in the present embodiment is once in a normal reach state (a state in which the same variable presentation as the normal reach is performed) after the reach is established, and develops from the normal reach state to the super reach. By developing from the normal reach state to the super reach, it is possible to give the player the impression of a high expectation of becoming a big hit.

  The special reach is a variation pattern in which the middle symbol row Z2 stops and is displayed for a certain time after a reach is established and after a longer time than the super reach. In the special reach in this embodiment, once in the normal reach state after reaching the reach, the normal reach state is developed to the super reach state (a state in which the same variable presentation as the super reach is performed), and further from the super reach state to the special reach. Do. By developing from the normal reach state to the super reach state and further to the special reach, it is possible to give the player an impression that the expectation of becoming a big hit gradually increases, and the player's interest Can be further enhanced. Further, in the special reach in the present embodiment, there is also prepared an aspect of developing into the special reach as it is without developing into the super reach state after being in the normal reach state. With this aspect, it is possible to give the player a surprise for the sudden development from the normal reach state to the special reach, and an impression that the expectation for becoming a big hit is dramatically increased, and it is possible to further enhance the interest in the game. .

  Since the 15R jackpot common table is a table selected in the case of the 15R probability variation jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot, various special reach types are easily selected in order to give the player a sense of expectation. However, by configuring the normal reach and the super reach to be selected as well, it is possible to provide a game that can expect a jackpot from any reach.

  A large number of normal reach, super reach, and special reach executed by the audio lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 are prepared with different effects even if they have the same fluctuation time. For example, in addition to the normal reach where no character is displayed, a reach where a predetermined character is displayed at the time of reaching the reach state or at other timing is prepared. In addition, various characters are prepared to be displayed in this case. Furthermore, the reach which changes a back image rapidly and displays, the reach which displays privilege images, such as animation, a drama, and a music video, the reach to which a notice production is added before a change start, the production which becomes a big hit by rechange is added. There are several different reach types, such as different reach types. As a result, a variety of fluctuation effects can be performed, and the player's interest can be enhanced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the change B or the change C is determined as the change pattern, not only the reach but also the change effect by the pseudo-link can be performed by the control of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. It has become. The pseudo ream is a stop display of one or more pseudo third symbols (a display in which all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are temporarily stopped temporarily. A pseudo stop) is performed during one variation production, and the pseudo stop is performed after the pseudo stop. It is an aspect of the fluctuation effect in which the fluctuation display of the third symbol is performed again. That is, a plurality of pseudo fluctuation effects (pseudo fluctuation) are performed during one fluctuation production. In the pseudo run, whenever the pseudo stop is performed, for example, the third symbol of "3" "4" "1" is displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1, middle symbol row Z2 and right symbol row Z3. Display or display the same or related characters on the third symbol display device 81, or display a part or all of the appearing characters or the third symbol in a color indicating an expectation to be a big hit, the same or related Make the third character display device 81 display the same or related character during the pseudo fluctuation every time the pseudo sound is produced or the character is operated, or the character is played By operating the game player, it is possible to increase the jackpot expectation for the player every time the pseudo stop or the pseudo change is performed. Thus, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

  The variation pattern selected exclusively for the 2R probability variation jackpot is 2R variation with a variation time of 59 seconds, and the correspondence with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 198. That is, when the jackpot type is 2R probability variation jackpot, 2R fluctuation (59 seconds) is determined as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  When 2R fluctuation (59 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern, one of the plurality of prepared 2R probability variation jackpot-only fluctuation modes is selected by the control of the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 The variation production is performed in the selected mode. As a variation mode dedicated to 2R probability variation jackpots, for example, a variation pattern in which the final first symbol (or third symbol) stops at a specific symbol together with the character of "chicken", or "girl" that does not normally appear Along with the character, a variation such as that the final first symbol (or third symbol) stops at a specific symbol is included.

  In addition, although the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit shall be determined using fluctuation type counter CS1, it may be constituted so that it may be determined using other several fluctuation type counters. For example, another fluctuation type counter may be provided to finely adjust the fluctuation time to about ± several seconds, and a notice effect for announcing the start of the jackpot or reach effect may be added before or during the fluctuation effect. May be determined by another variation type counter.

  FIG. 7D is a diagram schematically showing an example of the out-of-order (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 7D, the out-of-order (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 is completely out-only only and is referred to when the complete out is determined as the type of stop at the out, and the back and forth out of reach and back and forth out It is divided into groups (groups) based on reach common which is referred to when the non-reach is determined and the stop type at the time of out-of-range, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the divided groups It is attached.

  When the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area at the beginning of the change is not a value that will be a big hit (large hit random number value), that is, it is a value that comes off, the gaming state is low probability state ( However, when it is in the time saving state, the fluctuation corresponding to the value of fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area according to the stop type corresponding to the value of stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area A pattern is determined from the out-of-order (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

  For the complete deviation only, as the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation D ends in a short time of 7 seconds and the reach is not realized, the fluctuation time is longer than 10 seconds and the fluctuation D, but the fluctuation E in which the reach is not realized, the fluctuation The time is as long as 55 seconds, and there is a change F in which the pseudo change due to the pseudo-link is performed a plurality of times in one change and the reach is not completely established, and the value of the change type counter CS1 In the association of the change D (7 seconds) is 0 to 98, the change E (10 seconds) is 99 to 148, and the change F (55 seconds) is 149 to 198. Further, the reach common includes the fluctuation A (30 seconds), the fluctuation B (60 seconds) and the fluctuation C (90 seconds) as fluctuation patterns described above, and the correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is fluctuation A (30 seconds) is 0 to 98, fluctuation B (60 seconds) is 99 to 190, and fluctuation C (90 seconds) is 191 to 198.

  FIG. 7E is a view schematically showing an example of the deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 7E, the out-of-order (probable variation) change pattern table 202d2 is referred to when the complete out-of-range is decided as the stop type at the time of out-of-out Are separated into a reach common to be referred to when a reach other than the front and back out of reach and a reach other than the front and back out are determined as stop types at the time of exit.

  Then, for each divided group, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with the fluctuation pattern selected in each group. It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern (55 seconds) is not included in the fluctuation pattern selected when reference is made to complete deviation only, and only fluctuation D (7 seconds) and fluctuation E (10 seconds) are selected. In addition, the fluctuation pattern selected when reach common is referenced includes fluctuation A (30 seconds), fluctuation B (60 seconds), and fluctuation C (90 seconds) as in the out-of-order (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1. ).

  If the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is a value that does not make a big hit, that is, a value that becomes out of place, if the gaming state is in a time saving state or a high probability state (probability state), According to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area is a deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table It is determined from 202d2.

  In this deviation (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2, the correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for complete deviation only is such that fluctuation D (7 seconds) is 0 to 190 and fluctuation E (10 seconds) is 191 to 198. It has become. Further, the correspondence with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in common reach is 0 to 98 for fluctuation A (30 seconds), 99 to 190 for fluctuation B, and 191 to 198 for various types of outlier special reach.

  Since the out-of-order (probable change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is a table to be referred to when the gaming state is in the time saving state or the high probability state, the ball can enter the first entrance 64 or enters the ball. It becomes easy to ball. Therefore, when the time is short or high probability, if the fluctuation F with a fluctuation time of 55 seconds is performed or the fluctuation E with a relatively long fluctuation time is frequently performed despite being completely out of phase, It may take time until the start of the next variable display, giving the player a waiting state, which may cause discomfort. In addition, it is not preferable because the operation rate decreases as a hole. Therefore, in the case of complete removal, when the gaming state is in a short time or a high probability state at the time of probability change, the fluctuation F is not selected, and the gaming state fluctuates more than in the normal state except the shortness state. By configuring the variation D having a shorter variation time than E to be easily selected and performing the start of the next variation display early, the possibility of giving the player a sense of discomfort can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress an extreme decrease in the operating rate.

  It should be noted that even if the gaming state is a short time state or a high probability state and the state is completely off, the off (probable change) change pattern table 202d2 may be configured such that the change F (55 seconds) is selected. . However, also in this case, the variation pattern in the out-of-order (probable variation) variation pattern table 202 d 2 and the value of the variation type counter CS 1 are selected such that the probability that the variation D is selected is the highest and the probability that the variation F is selected is the lowest. May be defined. Further, when the gaming state is in the short time state or high probability state and completely out of the state, the change E is not selected (the value of the change type counter CS1 is not associated with the change E), only the change D Alternatively, the out-of-order (probability change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 may be configured such that the fluctuation D and the fluctuation F are selected. Even when the out-of-order (probable-change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is configured such that the fluctuation D and the fluctuation F are selected, the selection probability of the fluctuation D should be higher than the selection probability of the fluctuation F .

  In addition, although the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is selected using the fluctuation type counter CS1, a plurality of fluctuation type counters may be used in combination (selection of presence / absence of advance notice or the like may be selected). In addition, when reach is established at the time of detachment, the other variation type counter whether or not the first symbol (or third symbol) to be finally stopped is shifted (for example, one symbol is deviated back and forth etc.) It may be determined by

  Also, although the selection of the outlier type is divided into the outlier (ordinary) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 and the outlier (probable change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2, a plurality of holding balls are present even when the gaming state is normal. (For example, in the case of the maximum of four, three or more), the variable display may be ended early, so that it may be selected by referring to the out-of-order (probable change) fluctuation pattern table 202d2. It may be configured to prepare a fluctuation pattern table for normal use or probability change corresponding to the number of holding balls.

  Furthermore, in the fluctuation pattern table for each deviation shown in FIG. 7 (d) and FIG. 7 (e), when the fluctuation D and the fluctuation E are put together into just one fluctuation type “out” and the deviation is selected. Alternatively, the variation D and the variation E may be selected with a predetermined probability with reference to another table. Also in this case, a table corresponding to the number of holding balls may be prepared.

  Referring back to FIG. 6, the various counters will be described. As described above, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83. For example, 1 is added sequentially in the range of 0 to 250, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250) It is configured as a loop counter returning to zero. In the case where the second random number counter C4 makes one rotation (when an update is periodically performed from an initial value, the initial value is returned to the initial value by the next update), the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time Is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and it is detected that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67 which is either left or right. It is acquired when it is done.

  The number of random numbers to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. That is, it is determined to be won when the value of the second hit random number counter C4 obtained is in the range of "5-153", and the symbol "o" is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol) in the second symbol display device 83. Is displayed and the motorized accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened (enlarged) for a predetermined time. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14). As well as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 20).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and the like are stored in addition to the counter buffer 203b for storing various counters shown in FIG. It has an area and a work area (work area) in which various flags, counters, values of I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply unit 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 20), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 19) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 18) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  The RAM 203 further includes at least a holding ball number counter 203a. The holding ball number counter 203a holds the fluctuation display (the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entering of the ball into the first entrance 64 (start winning). It is a counter that counts the number of balls (the number of waits) up to four times. The initial value of this holding ball number counter 203a is set to zero, and 1 is added up to the maximum value 4 each time the ball is inserted into the first entrance 64 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. (See S1403 in FIG. 17). On the other hand, whenever the variable display based on entering the ball into the first entrance 64 (start winning) is executed, the number-of-retention ball counter 203a is decremented by 1 (see S1205 in FIG. 15).

  The value of the holding ball number counter 203a (that is, the holding ball number) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see S1406 in FIG. 17). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the holding ball number counter 203a is incremented by one after being entered into the first entrance 64.

  The voice lamp control device 113 is the value of the number of balls in the variable display itself which is suspended in the main controller 110 by the number-of-balls-in-hold command transmitted from the main controller 110 every time the number-of-balls counter 203a is incremented. You can get As a result, the number of holding balls in the variable display managed by the holding ball number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113 deviates from the number of holding balls in the actual variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise and the like. Even if the ball has been dropped, it is possible to correct the deviation by means of the command for holding ball number received next.

  The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send a ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number-of-held-balls number pattern in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of held balls notified by the number-of-held-cells-for-display command.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the specified winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side and a solenoid for driving a motorized part is connected to the MPU 201. The MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 is outputted from the various switches 208. Various processings are executed based on the control signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 18) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound in an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34), and The setting of the display mode of the symbol display device 81 is controlled.

  The audio lamp control device 113 generates an audio signal to be reproduced by generating an audio signal to be reproduced, and an audio output device 226 based on the generated audio signal to generate sound. A sound output LSI 301 to output and a sound data ROM 306 which is a memory storing various sound data are included. The audio data ROM 306 is connected to the sound output LSI 301, and the sound output LSI 301 is connected to the MPU 221 via the signal line 228.

  The sound output LSI 301 is a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) that generates a sound to be reproduced based on an instruction from the MPU 221 and outputs the generated sound from the audio output device 226. When the reproduction start command is set from the MPU 221, the sound output LSI 301 specifies a sound to start reproduction instructed by the reproduction start command, and reads out from the sound data ROM 306 audio data corresponding to the specified sound. Generate a sound to play. Then, the sound output LSI 301 outputs the generated sound from the sound output device 226. Further, when the reproduction end command is set by the MPU 221, the sound output LSI 301 specifies the sound to be ended by the reproduction instructed by the reproduction end command, and ends the reproduction of the specified sound.

  The sound output LSI 301 has reproduction channels for 16 channels, generates a maximum of 16 sounds simultaneously, synthesizes (mixes), and outputs the sound from the audio output device 226. Further, the sound output LSI 301 mutes the output of the sound being reproduced for each channel (or for each type of sound being reproduced or for each sound data being reproduced) according to the setting from the MPU 221, and the mute is performed. Can be released. The channel, sound or sound data for which mute is set is the target of muting when the sound output LSI 301 reads out the corresponding sound data to generate a sound to be reproduced, but mixes it with the sound of another channel. The sound to be muted is not mixed by setting the level of the sound to 0 or not inputting the sound to be muted to the mixing circuit. As a result, the sound to be muted is not output from the audio output device 226.

  Here, an example of the audio data stored in the audio data ROM 306 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of audio data stored in the audio data ROM 306. As shown in FIG. In the voice data ROM 306, for example, reach BGM data 306a and normal BGM data 306b are stored together with other voice data 306c.

  The BGM data for reach 306 a is a sound output from the voice output device 226 as background music at the time of the reach when it is in the reach state in the fluctuation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 (hereinafter referred to as “ Audio data for reproducing "reach BGM". The reach BGM of the present embodiment includes a basic part consisting of a rhythm and a basic melody line (melody), a superior musical instrument part on which a decorative performance by a musical instrument is performed by covering the basic part, and a basic It is composed of a song part in which a song by human voice is put on a part and a musical instrument part. The reach BGM data 306a includes basic part data 306a1 as audio data corresponding to the basic part, upper musical instrument part data 306a2 as audio data corresponding to the upper musical instrument part, and song part data 306a3 as audio data corresponding to the song part. It contains.

  The basic part data 306a1, the upper instrument part data 306a2, and the song part data 306a3 are all reproduced at the same tempo, and when three parts are simultaneously reproduced using the three part data 306a1 to a3, the basic part The musical instrument part and the song part are covered and progressed simultaneously, and are output from the audio output device 226 as one music. In addition, when these three part data 306a1 to a3 are reproduced to the end, they are returned to the beginning again and reproduced in a loop. Here, the three part data 306a1 to a3 end reproduction for one loop at the same timing, and return to the beginning at the same timing to start reproduction again.

  When reach (normal reach) is established in the fluctuation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 221 sends all of the basic part, the upper musical instrument part, and the song part to the sound output LSI 301 as a reach BGM. While instructing reproduction of the part, mute is set for the musical instrument part and the song part.

  The sound output LSI 301 reads out each data of the basic part data 306a1, the upper instrument part data 306a2 and the song part data 306a3 from the audio data ROM 306 according to the setting from the MPU 221, and reproduces it using one channel for one data. Generate a sound that should be. That is, using the three channels of the sound output LSI 301, sounds to be reproduced are generated for all parts of the basic part of the reach BGM, the upper musical instrument part, and the song part. On the other hand, since mute is set for the musical instrument part and the song part, the sounds generated for these parts are not mixed and not output from the audio output device 226. Therefore, when reach (normal reach) is established in the fluctuation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, only the sound corresponding to the basic part is reproduced from the sound output device 226.

  On the other hand, when the normal reach is changed to the super reach in the fluctuation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 221 sets the sound output LSI 301 to mute cancellation of the upper musical instrument part. The sound output LSI 301 cancels the mute of the upper musical instrument part according to the setting from the MPU 221, mixes not only the basic part but also the sound generated for the upper musical instrument part, and outputs it from the audio output device 226. . As a result, the reach BGM, which has been output from the voice output device 206 only for the basic part so far, is covered by the upper musical instrument part over the basic part at the timing when the reach BGM has developed from normal reach to super reach. Output from

  Furthermore, in the fluctuation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, when the development reaches from the super reach to the special reach, the MPU 221 sets the mute of the song part to the sound output LSI 301. The sound output LSI 301 cancels the mute of the song part according to the setting from the MPU 221, mixes not only the basic part and the musical instrument part but also the sound generated for the song part, and outputs it from the audio output device 226 Do. As a result, the reach BGM for which the basic part and the upper instrument part have been output from the audio output device 206 until then is developed from the super reach to the special reach with respect to the basic part and the upper instrument part. The song part is covered and the reach BGM is output from the audio output device 206.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the BGM for reach output from the audio output device 226 every time the normal reach changes to the super reach and the super reach changes to the special reach from the basic part only to the basic part + superior item The instrument part, the basic part + the upper instrument part + the song part and so on gradually become more and more flashy. Thereby, when the reach of the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 develops, the player is not only from the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 but also the voice output device The reach BGM output from 226 can improve the expectation of becoming a jackpot.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the BGM is flashed every time it develops from normal reach to super reach and from super reach to special reach, audio data for normal reach to be reproduced at normal reach and reproduction at super reach are performed. The voice data for super reach and the voice data for special reach to play at the time of special reach were prepared separately. Then, when reach (normal reach) is established, playback and output is performed using voice data for normal reach, and when it is developed into super reach, switching from voice data for normal reach (stop playback) and voice for super reach The data is used to play back and output, and when it has developed into a special reach, it switches from the audio data for super reach (stops playback) and plays back using a board with the voice for special reach. However, with this configuration, playback and output of voice data for super reach and voice data for special reach are started when developing to super reach or special reach, so the BGM cues at each timing. Because it is done, the continuity of BGM is interrupted, and it has become a result of putting water on the improvement of the sense of expectation that becomes a big hit.

  On the other hand, when the reach is established, the sound output LSI 301 starts reproduction of all the parts of the basic part, the upper musical instrument part, and the song part constituting the reach BGM, while the normal musical instrument during the normal reach The part and song part are muted, the mute part is unmuted when developing from normal reach to super reach, and the mute part is unmuted when developed from super reach to special reach. That is, when developing from the normal reach to the super reach, the basic instrument part which has been reproduced and output until that time is continuously reproduced and output as it is, while the superior instrument part is reproduced and output so as to cover the basic part. In addition, when developing from super reach to special reach, the basic part and the upper instrument part that have been reproduced and output until then are continuously reproduced and output as they are, while covering the basic part and the upper instrument part The song part is played back and output. Thereby, when developing into super reach or special reach, the BGM for reach can be flashed without interruption. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation also from the aspect of music according to the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without using water to improve the expectation of becoming a big hit by BGM as in the conventional pachinko machine Can be enhanced. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved by using the music.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the aspect which develops at a stretch from a normal reach to a special reach in the change production performed by the 3rd symbol display device 81 is also included. As described above, when developing from the normal reach to the special reach, the MPU 221 sets, for the sound output LSI 301, the mute release of the upper musical instrument part and the song part. The sound output LSI 301 cancels the mute of the upper musical instrument part and the song part according to the setting from the MPU 221, and mixes not only the basic part but also the sound generated for the upper musical instrument part and the song part. Output from the output device 226. As a result, the reach BGM, which has been output from the voice output device 206 only for the basic part until then, is extended from the normal reach to the special reach, and the basic instrument part and the song part are covered with the basic instrument part and the song part. Are output from the audio output device 206. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, when the reach from the normal output to the special reach is rapidly developed, the BGM for reach output from the audio output device 226 includes only the basic part, the basic part + the musical instrument part + the song part, Suddenly you become a flasher. Thereby, the player can improve the expectation of becoming a big hit at a stretch by the reach BGM outputted from the voice output device 226 as well as from the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also in this case, when developing from the normal reach to the special reach, the basic part that has been reproduced and outputted until that time is continuously reproduced and outputted as it is, and the upper musical instrument part and the song part are covered over the basic part Is played back and output. Thereby, when developing from a normal reach to a special reach at a stretch, the continuity of the BGM for reach can be flashed without interruption. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation also from the aspect of music according to the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without using water to improve the expectation of becoming a big hit by BGM as in the conventional pachinko machine Can be enhanced. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved by using the music.

  The normal BGM data 306 b is voice data for reproducing a sound (hereinafter, referred to as “normal BGM”) output from the voice output device 226 as background music during a game while the player is playing a game. Here, the player plays a game when there is no entering a ball into the first ball entrance 64 for a predetermined period (for example, 2 minutes) in a state where neither a fluctuation effect nor a jackpot effect is performed in the third symbol display device 81. A demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as not being performed. Background music (BGM) is not output from the audio output device 226 while the demonstration effect is displayed. On the other hand, when the first ball entrance 64 has entered the ball, fluctuation effect is started on the third symbol display device 81, and normal BGM is output from the sound output device 226 as background music.

  Normally, BGM executes an effect that enhances the interest in the game for the player such as the reach state or the jackpot effect (including the opening effect and the ending effect) until the demonstration effect is displayed again on the third symbol display device 64. It is output from the audio output device 226 at the normal time which is not. In addition, while effects such as reach state or jackpot effect are performed to enhance the interest to the game to the player, background music according to each effect as an extraordinary time (for example, reach BGM in reach state, jackpot The jackpot BGM etc.) at the time of presentation is output from the audio output device 226.

  The normal BGM is composed of four measures (the first measure to the fourth measure), and the normal BGM of the four measures is loop-reproduced from the audio output device 226. That is, when the normal BGM is reproduced from the first bar to the fourth bar, the BGM returns to the first bar again, and the first bar to the fourth bar are repeatedly reproduced. In the present embodiment, the case where the normal BGM is composed of four bars will be described, but the number of bars constituting the normal BGM may be an arbitrary number. That is, the normal BGM may be composed of 5 bars or 3 bars.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the normal BGM data 306b has audio data for each measure (the first to fourth measures), and each measure is further different in rhythm, melody, backing (accompaniment), etc. It has 10 patterns of audio data. That is, the first bar first pattern data 306b10, the first bar second pattern data 306b11,..., The first bar tenth pattern data 306b19 and the sound data of 10 patterns as sound data of the first bar of normal BGM The second measure first pattern data 306b20, the second measure second pattern data 306b21,..., The second measure tenth pattern data 306b29, and the sound of 10 patterns, which are prepared in the audio data ROM 306, as the second bar audio data. Data is prepared in the audio data ROM 306, and the third bar first pattern data 306b30, the third bar second pattern data 306b31,..., The third bar tenth pattern data 306b39 and 10 patterns as the third bar audio data. Voice data is prepared in the voice data ROM 306 The fourth bar first pattern data 306 b 40, the fourth bar second pattern data 306 b 41,..., The fourth bar tenth pattern data 306 b 49 and the 10 patterns of audio data are stored as the audio data of the fourth bar. It is prepared for.

  In the patterns prepared for each measure, the same pattern is played with a uniform rhythm and backing. That is, if the music from the first bar to the fourth bar is played with only the first pattern, normal BGM is reproduced with the rhythm and backing unified in the first pattern. In addition, if all of the first bar to the fourth bar are played with only the tenth pattern, normal BGM is reproduced with the rhythm and backing unified in the tenth pattern.

  Also, in this embodiment, the rhythm and backing of the second and tenth patterns are aurally closest to the rhythm and backing of the first pattern, and then the rhythm and backing of the third and ninth patterns are auditory It is very close. Also, with respect to the rhythm and backing of the second pattern, the rhythm and backing of the first and third patterns are acoustically closest, and then the rhythm and backing of the fourth and tenth patterns are acoustically similar. It has become. With respect to the third pattern rhythm and backing, the second pattern and fourth pattern rhythm and backing are acoustically closest, and the first and fifth patterns rhythm and backing are acoustically similar. It has become. For the fourth pattern rhythm and backing, the third and fifth pattern rhythms and backing are acoustically closest, and then, for the second and sixth patterns rhythm and backing are acoustically similar. It has become. For the fifth pattern rhythm and backing, the fourth and sixth pattern rhythms and backing are acoustically closest, and then, for the third and seventh patterns rhythm and backing are acoustically similar. It has become.

  For the rhythm and backing of the sixth pattern, the rhythm and backing of the fifth and seventh patterns are acoustically closest, and then the rhythm and backing of the fourth and eighth patterns are acoustically similar. It has become. With respect to the seventh pattern rhythm and backing, the sixth pattern and eighth pattern rhythm and backing are acoustically closest, and the fifth and ninth patterns rhythm and backing are acoustically similar. It has become. With respect to the rhythm and backing of the eighth pattern, the rhythm and backing of the seventh and ninth patterns are the acoustically closest, and then the rhythm and backing of the sixth and tenth patterns are acoustically similar. It has become. With respect to the rhythm and backing of the ninth pattern, the rhythm and backing of the eighth and tenth patterns are the acoustically closest, and then the rhythm and backing of the seventh and first patterns are acoustically similar. It has become. Then, with respect to the rhythm and backing of the tenth pattern, the rhythm and backing of the first and ninth patterns are acoustically closest, and then the rhythm and backing of the second and eighth patterns are acoustically similar It has become a thing.

  When outputting normal BGM from the audio output device 226, the MPU 221 sets the sound output LSI 301 to start reproduction of the measure at each output start timing of the measure to be reproduced. At this time, the MPU 221 predetermines a pattern to be used for reproduction of the bar from among 10 patterns, and includes information for specifying the determined pattern in setting of reproduction start of the bar to the sound output LSI 301. In this embodiment, when the MPU 221 sets the start of bar reproduction to the sound output LSI 301, a case is described where information for specifying the determined pattern is included. However, the start of bar reproduction to the sound output LSI 301 is described. Separately from the setting, the MPU 221 may be configured to set information for specifying a pattern determined together with the setting (before or after the setting).

  When the reproduction start is set from the MPU 221, the sound output LSI 301 determines which pattern of which measure is to be reproduced and reads out the corresponding audio data from the normal BGM data 306b. Then, the sound output LSI 301 generates a normal BGM according to the read voice data, mixes it with another generated sound, and outputs the generated normal BGM from the sound output device 226.

  Thus, when normal BGM is played back, the pattern to be played back in each bar is determined from among 10 patterns each time each bar is played back, so the pattern played back in one loop (4 bars) is 10 × 10 × 10 × 10 = 10000 patterns are obtained. This allows the player to hear a different pattern every time one loop of normal BGM is played back, thereby eliminating the feeling that the normal BGM is looped and not getting bored even if it is listened to for a long time, The player can always feel the newness.

  The method of determining the pattern used for reproducing the measure will be described with reference to FIG. 9 together with the description of the normal BGM pattern table 222b of the ROM 222 described later.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a case is described in which audio data of 10 patterns different in rhythm, melody, backing (accompaniment), etc. are prepared for each measure of normal BGM, but audio data prepared for each measure The number of patterns of may be arbitrary. That is, five patterns or twenty patterns may be used. Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the number of patterns prepared for each bar is the same 10 patterns in any bar will be described, but the number of patterns prepared for each bar is different for each bar May be

  Also, each pattern prepared for one measure may be altered with respect to the basic melody (subject). As a result, even if a pattern to be reproduced in each measure is selected, the music reproduced in each measure can be enjoyed as a series of melody because it reminds of a basic melody.

  In addition, each pattern prepared for one measure may be one in which the basic melody is unified and the melody is arranged. By this, even if the pattern to be reproduced in each measure is selected, since the music reproduced in each measure has the same basic melody, the normal BGM reproduced in one loop always reproduces the same melody. be able to. Therefore, in this case, although the change in normal BGM reproduced in one loop is felt small for the player, it is possible to easily suppress the generation of a strange melody even if any pattern is selected in each measure. It is easy to compose and arrange patterns.

  As the other sound data 306c, when the opening effect, the round effect, and the ending effect of the jackpot effect are performed in the third symbol display device 81, the sound output for each effect or the third symbol display device The voice output when the character displayed in 81 small area Ds2 performs a special operation, the voice output when another character appears in small area Ds2, the moving image displayed in small area Ds3 Audio data for causing the audio output device 226 to output various types of audio such as audio that is output in the event and audio that is output in accordance with the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored.

  The data format of the audio data stored in the audio data ROM 306 may be arbitrary. For example, it may be a data format in which a sound waveform is sampled by a linear pulse code variation method, or data compressed by various audio compression methods such as MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer-3) and AAC (Advanced Audio Coding). It may be

  Alternatively, a MIDI file conforming to the MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) standard for producing various sounds may be stored in the voice data ROM 306 as voice data. In this case, the sound output LSI 301 is provided with a MIDI sound source, reads out from the audio data ROM 306 a MIDI file for reproducing the type of sound instructed to start reproduction from the MPU 221, and generates the MIDI sound source according to the read MIDI file. Then, play the sound.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the lamp display unit 227, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  From the main control device 110, various commands (a variation pattern command, a stop type command, a determination command, a hold ball number command, etc.) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in one direction according to the game situation. From the display control device 114, a display type command for notifying the display content (display type) to be displayed in the third symbol display device 81 from now on is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, when the player operates the frame button 22, an on signal is output to the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 displays an aspect (display aspect) of an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 including a variable effect based on various commands transmitted from the main control device 110 and the player's operation condition with respect to the frame button 22. A command to notify the mode of the determined effect and the determined effect is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  Further, the MPU 221 controls lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 based on the display type notified by the display type command transmitted from the display control device 114, and outputs sound of the sound output device 226 as sound. Execute on the output LSI. Thereby, according to the image displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, the lamp display apparatus 227 can be made to light and blink, or a sound can be output from the audio output apparatus 226.

  The MPU 221 has a program ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like. The program ROM 222 stores at least a detailed variation pattern determination table 222a and a normal BGM pattern table 222b as unique value data. The RAM 223 has at least a holding ball number counter 223a, a display type flag 223b, a reproduction time counter 223c, a normal BGM pattern counter 223d, and a detailed change pattern determination counter 223e.

  The detailed variation pattern determination table 222a is a table for determining a variation aspect (detailed variation pattern) of variation effects to be started based on the variation pattern (variation time) notified from the main controller 110 by the variation pattern command. This is used together with the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223e of the RAM 223. Here, the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223e will be described together with the detailed variation pattern determination table 222a.

  In the present embodiment, no character is displayed during the variation time of 30 seconds as a detailed variation pattern determined when variation A (a variation time of 30 seconds) is instructed from the main controller 110 by a variation pattern command. In addition to the normal reach, there are prepared a plurality of normal reach in which a predetermined character is displayed while changing.

  As a detailed pattern determined when fluctuation B (a fluctuation time of 60 seconds) is instructed, fluctuation presentation is performed in the same manner (normal reach state) as normal normal reach after reach is established, and thereafter super reach specific There are a number of things that develop into a super reach, with characters and videos being displayed, and the back image changing rapidly and being displayed, etc. In addition, pseudo fluctuation is executed multiple times during the fluctuation time of 60 seconds. There are several pseudo-runs.

  As a detailed pattern determined when a change C (a change time of 90 seconds) is instructed, a change effect is performed in the same mode (normal reach state) as a normal reach after an reach is established, and a mode similar to a super reach (Super reach state), then special reach characters and videos are displayed, and the back image changes and is displayed faster than in the super reach state, etc. After the formation of the reach, the fluctuation production is performed in the same manner as the normal reach (normal reach state), and then the special reach character or video is displayed without developing to the super reach state, and the back image is the super reach Develops a special reach by changing and displaying faster than in the state The other, which provides several pseudo communication is more ready to pseudo vary during the 90 second time-varying is performed more than once.

  As a detailed variation pattern determined when 2R variation (a variation time of 59 seconds) is instructed, a plurality of variation modes dedicated to 2R probability variation jackpots with a variation time of 59 seconds are prepared. When a change F (a change time of 55 seconds) is instructed, a false change due to a pseudo-link is performed a plurality of times within a change time of 55 seconds, and a detailed change that is completely out without reaching a reach finally Several patterns are prepared.

  In addition, detailed fluctuation patterns that can be selected depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the normal state, the time saving state, or the probability changing state are also prepared for each fluctuation pattern (fluctuation A to fluctuation C, 2R fluctuation). Note that, as described above, the change F is instructed only when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (except for the time saving state), and the detailed change pattern prepared for the change F is pachinko The game state of the machine 10 is selected only in the normal state except for the short time state. However, even if the gaming state is short or definite, the variation F may be indicated as a variation pattern. In this case, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is also normal or short for the variation F. A detailed variation pattern may be prepared which may be selected depending on whether it is a definite variation condition.

  The detailed change pattern determination table 222a and the detailed change pattern determination counter 223e are prepared for the change pattern notified by the change pattern command when the change pattern command and the stop type command are received from the main control device 110. Among a plurality of detailed fluctuation patterns, it is used to determine one detailed fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect to be executed with respect to the fluctuation pattern command.

  The detailed variation pattern determination counter 223e is configured by a loop counter, and the update thereof is periodically performed (in the counter update process of S1910 executed every 1 ms in the main process (see FIG. 22) in the present embodiment) To be done. The update of the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223e is performed by sequentially adding one by one within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in the present embodiment), and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (99). Further, an initial value "0" is set in the initial value setting process (S1810) of the RAM which is executed in the startup process (see FIG. 21) executed at the time of power on.

  In the detailed variation pattern determination table 222a, various types of variation patterns (variation A, fluctuation B, fluctuation C, 2R fluctuation, fluctuation F) notified from the main controller 110 are prepared for each fluctuation pattern. The value of the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223e is assigned in association with the detailed variation pattern of. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern notified from main controller 110 is any of fluctuation A to C, 2R fluctuation, the correspondence between the detailed fluctuation pattern and the value of detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223e is a fluctuation effect Depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 being played (normal state, positive change state, or short time state), the change pattern (depending on whether the symbol displayed in the change effect is "big hit" or "off" Each of the fluctuations (A to C, 2R fluctuation) is separately associated.

  When the MPU 221 receives the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the MPU 221 reads out the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223e at that time from the RAM 223. Then, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the normal state and the jackpot from the fluctuation type notified by the received stop type command, the fluctuation pattern notified by the received fluctuation pattern command, When the gaming state is the "normal state" and the stop type is the "big hit", the detailed fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223e read from the RAM 223, from the detailed fluctuation pattern determination table 222a Identify. In addition, when it is determined that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is short, and it is determined that the variation type notified by the received stop type command is out of the game, the gaming state is compared to the variation pattern notified by the received variation pattern command. In the case of “time saving state” and the stop type being “outside”, the detailed fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223 e read from the RAM 223 is specified from the detailed fluctuation pattern determination table 222 a .

  However, if the fluctuation pattern notified by the received fluctuation pattern command is fluctuation F, the gaming state at that time is “normal state” and the stop type is “completely out”, so the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter read from RAM 223 The detailed fluctuation pattern associated with the value of 223 e is specified from the detailed fluctuation pattern determination table 222 a regardless of the game state / stop type. In the case of a pachinko machine in which the variation F is selected as the variation pattern even in the “time saving condition” or the “probability variation condition”, if the variation pattern notified by the received variation pattern command is the variation F, the RAM 223 The detailed variation pattern associated with the value of the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223e read out may be specified from the detail variation pattern determination table 222a according to the gaming state regardless of the stop type.

  In the pachinko machine where fluctuation F can be selected as the fluctuation pattern when the gaming state is “normal state” and the stop type is “completely out”, or the fluctuation type is “completely out” regardless of the gaming state In a pachinko machine where a fluctuation F can be selected as a fluctuation pattern in a certain case, even if the fluctuation pattern notified by the received fluctuation pattern command is the fluctuation F, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in which the fluctuation effect is performed The detailed variation pattern determination table 222a corresponds to the value of the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223e read out from the RAM 223 according to whether the symbol displayed in the variation effect is "big hit" or "out". You may specify from

  In the case of the pachinko machine where the variation F is selected when the gaming state is the “normal state”, if the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command received in the “time saving state” or the “probability state” is the variation F , The fluctuation pattern may be wrong. In addition, even if the stop type is “big hit”, “reach before or after out of reach” or “reach other than before or after out of reach”, the change pattern indicated by the received change pattern command is also change F if the change pattern is It may be wrong. Thus, if there is a possibility that the fluctuation pattern is erroneous, for example, all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are fluctuated at high speed throughout the fluctuation effect, or the third symbol is made invisible to the player. Such a special variation presentation mode may be selected as a detailed variation pattern. Even if such a special fluctuation effect is selected as a detailed fluctuation pattern, all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 should be stopped and confirmed displayed based on the confirmation command transmitted from main controller 110 after the fluctuation time has elapsed. Can. Therefore, even if the fluctuation pattern is incorrect, it is possible to show the player a feeling of fluctuation without a sense of discomfort.

  The MPU 221 notifies the display control device 114 of the determined detailed fluctuation pattern by the display fluctuation pattern command. The display control device 114 controls the fluctuation display of the third symbol display device 81 based on the detailed fluctuation pattern notified by the display fluctuation pattern command. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 performs a fluctuation effect by the determined detailed fluctuation pattern. Further, the display control device 114 displays the display contents (high-speed fluctuation, left symbol row Z1 stop, right symbol row Z1 stop, normal reach, super) which are to be displayed from now on the third symbol display device 81 based on the determined detailed variation pattern Reach, special reach, finalized display, etc. are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a display type command. The audio lamp control device 113 controls lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 based on the display type indicated by the display type command, and causes the sound output LSI to execute sound output in the sound output device 226. . As a result, the lamp display device 227 can be lighted and blinked, and sound can be output from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, for fluctuation D (variation time 7 seconds) which is one of the fluctuation patterns instructed by the fluctuation pattern command from main controller 110, the high-speed fluctuation in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of 5.5 seconds After that, the stop of the left symbol row Z1, the stop of the right symbol row Z3, and the stop of the middle symbol row Z2 are performed in 1.5 seconds, and the detailed variation pattern of the aspect completely disengaging is pachinko machine One for each of the ten gaming states. That is, for the fluctuation D, one detailed fluctuation pattern for the gaming state is a normal state, and one detailed fluctuation pattern for the gaming state is a short time or a probability change state. These two detailed change patterns with respect to the change D differ in the movement (expression) of the boy displayed in the small area Ds2, and the change display itself of the third pattern displayed in the main display area Dm is identical.

  In addition, for fluctuation E (the fluctuation time 10 seconds), after the high-speed fluctuation of all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of 8.5 seconds, it takes 1.5 seconds to stop the left symbol row Z1, and the right symbol row A stop of Z3 and a stop of the middle symbol row Z2 are performed, and a detailed variation pattern of an aspect in which the game is completely out is prepared for each gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. That is, for the fluctuation E, one detailed fluctuation pattern for the gaming state is a normal state, and one detailed fluctuation pattern for the gaming state is a short time or a probability change state. In these two detailed change patterns for change E, as in the case of change D, the movement (expression) of the boy displayed in the small area Ds2 is different, and the third display pattern displayed in the main display area Dm. The variable display itself is the same.

  When one of the fluctuations D and E is instructed from the main control unit 110, the MPU 221 is prepared corresponding to each of the gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 regardless of the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern determination counter 223e. A detailed fluctuation pattern is determined, and the detailed fluctuation pattern is notified to the display control device 114 by the display fluctuation pattern command.

  Note that in at least one of the fluctuation D and the fluctuation E, a plurality of detailed fluctuation patterns may be prepared such that a predetermined character is displayed in the small area Ds 3 or the like for the same gaming state. In this case, when the variation D or the variation E in which a plurality of detailed variation patterns are prepared for the same gaming state is notified by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the variations A to C, 2R The detailed change pattern may be determined based on the detailed change pattern determination table 222a and the detailed change pattern determination counter 223e by the same method as when the change or change F is notified.

  Here, in the sound lamp control device 113, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the stop type indicated by the stop type command received so far (15R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, front and back outreach, back and forth out It is judged on the basis of (other reach, completely out) and the number of changes.

  For example, in the stop type command corresponding to a certain fluctuation effect, when the 15R probability variation jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot is indicated as the stop classification, after the jackpot effect after the variation production, the pachinko machine 10 until the jackpot next time It is determined that the gaming state is a definite change state. In addition, when 15R normal jackpot is indicated as the stop type in the stop type command corresponding to a certain fluctuation effect, after the jackpot effect after the fluctuation effect, until 100 fluctuation effects are performed, or the next big hit Until it becomes, it is determined that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a time saving state. Then, after 100 times of the variable effects, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is determined to be the normal state until the next big hit.

  The normal BGM pattern table 222b is a table for determining a pattern to be used (reproduced) in a measure to be reproduced from now when the normal BGM is output from the audio output device 226, and is combined with the normal BGM pattern counter 223d of the RAM 223. Used. As described above, in the normal BGM data 306b used for normal BGM reproduction, sound data of 10 patterns different in rhythm, melody, backing (accompaniment), etc. are prepared for each measure (first to fourth measures). (See Figure 8). When normal music is played back, the MPU 221 selects, for each measure, a pattern to be used for playing the measure from among the 10 patterns of audio data prepared for the measure, the normal BGM pattern counter 223 d at that time. It is usually determined from the BGM pattern table 222b based on the value.

  The normal BGM pattern counter 223d is configured by a loop counter, and the updating thereof is performed in the processing of S1914 that is repeatedly executed in the main processing (see FIG. 22). The update of the normal BGM pattern counter 223d is performed by sequentially adding one by one within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in the present embodiment), and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (99). Further, an initial value "0" is set in the initial value setting process (S1810) of the RAM which is executed in the startup process (see FIG. 21) executed at the time of power on.

  Here, the details of the normal BGM pattern table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic view schematically showing the normal BGM pattern table 222b. In the normal BGM pattern table 222b, one normal BGM pattern table is prepared for each of the first to tenth patterns. More specifically, the normal BGM pattern table 222 b includes 10 types of normal BGMs of the first pattern normal BGM pattern table 222 b 0 corresponding to the first pattern and the tenth pattern normal BGM pattern table 222 b 9 corresponding to the tenth pattern. It has a pattern table. FIG. 9 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the first pattern normal BGM pattern table 222b0, and FIG. 9 (b) schematically shows a fifth pattern normal BGM pattern table 222b4. FIG. 9C is a schematic view schematically showing a tenth pattern normal BGM pattern table 222b6.

  When determining the pattern to be used in the measure to be reproduced from now on, the MPU 221 sets the normal BGM pattern table corresponding to the pattern used in the measure one before the measure to be determined to the first pattern normal BGM. The pattern table 222b0 to the tenth pattern normal BGM pattern table 222b9 are selected. For example, if the pattern used in the measure immediately before the measure to be determined is the first pattern, the first pattern normal BGM pattern table 222b0 is selected. If the pattern used in the measure one before the measure to be determined is the fifth pattern, the fifth pattern normal BGM pattern table 222b4 is selected. If the pattern used in the measure immediately before the measure to be determined is the tenth pattern, the tenth pattern normal BGM pattern table 222b9 is selected.

  In each normal BGM pattern table 222b0 to 222b9, the number of the pattern to be determined for the value that can be taken by the normal BGM pattern counter 223d (“1” if the pattern to be determined is the first pattern, and the second pattern If it is “2”,..., If it is the tenth pattern, “10” is assigned. The MPU 221 selects the normal BGM pattern table from the first pattern normal BGM pattern table 222b0 to the tenth pattern normal BGM pattern table 222b9 according to the method described above when determining the pattern to be used in the measure to be reproduced from now. Then, in the selected normal BGM pattern table, the pattern to be used in the measure to be reproduced from now is determined from the number of the pattern assigned to the value of the normal BGM pattern counter 223d at that time. For example, if the number of the assigned pattern is "1", the pattern to be used in the measure to be reproduced from now is determined to be the first pattern, and if the number of the assigned pattern is "10", it is to be reproduced from this The pattern used in the measure is determined to be the tenth pattern.

  Here, in the first pattern normal BGM pattern table 222b0, as shown in FIG. 9A, “1” indicating the first pattern is assigned to the values “0” to “3” of the normal BGM pattern counter 223d. And "2" indicating the second pattern is assigned to the values "4" to "23" of the normal BGM pattern counter 223d, and the tenth to the values "24" to "39" of the normal BGM pattern counter 223d. "10" indicating a pattern is assigned, and "3" indicating a third pattern is assigned to values "40" to "53" of normal BGM pattern counter 223d, and values "54" to normal BGM pattern counter 223d are assigned. “9” indicating the ninth pattern is assigned to “65”, and the value “66” to “75” of the normal BGM pattern counter 223 d is assigned. The fourth pattern "4" is assigned, and the values "76" to "83" of the normal BGM pattern counter 223d are assigned "8" indicating the eighth pattern. The value "84" of the normal BGM pattern counter 223d is assigned. “5” representing the fifth pattern is assigned to “91” to “91”, “7” indicating the seventh pattern is assigned to values “92” to “95” of normal BGM pattern counter 223 d “6” indicating the sixth pattern is assigned to values “96” to “99” of the BGM pattern counter 223 d.

  That is, when the pattern used in the measure one before the measure to be determined is the first pattern, the second pattern is selected with a probability of 20/100 as the pattern used in the measure to be determined, The tenth pattern is selected with probability 16/100, the third pattern is selected with probability 14/100, the ninth pattern is selected with probability 12/100, and the fourth pattern is selected with probability 10/100 And the eighth pattern is selected with a probability of 8/100, the fifth pattern is selected with a probability of 8/100, the seventh pattern is selected with a probability of 4/100, and the sixth pattern with a probability of 4/100 Is selected, and the first pattern is selected with a probability of 4/100.

  Further, in the fifth pattern normal BGM pattern table 222b4, as shown in FIG. 9B, "5" is assigned to the values "0" to "3" of the normal BGM pattern counter 223d, and the normal BGM pattern counter "6" is assigned to the values "4" to "23" of 223d, "4" is assigned to the values "24" to "39" of the normal BGM pattern counter 223d, and the normal BGM pattern counter 223d is assigned "7" is assigned to the values "40" to "53", "3" is assigned to the values "54" to "65" of the normal BGM pattern counter 223d, and the value "normal" of the normal BGM pattern counter 223d "8" is assigned to 66 "to" 75 ", and" 2 "is assigned to the value" 76 "to" 83 "of the normal BGM pattern counter 223d. Normally, "9" is assigned to the values "84" to "91" of the BGM pattern counter 223d, and "1" is assigned to the values "92" to "95" of the normal BGM pattern counter 223d. Normally, "10" is assigned to the values "96" to "99" of the BGM pattern counter 223d.

  That is, when the pattern used in the measure one before the measure to be determined is the fifth pattern, the sixth pattern is selected with a probability of 20/100 as the pattern to be used in the measure to be determined, The fourth pattern is selected with a probability of 16/100, the seventh pattern is selected with a probability of 14/100, the third pattern is selected with a probability of 12/100, and the eighth pattern is selected with a probability of 10/100 And the second pattern is selected with a probability of 8/100, the ninth pattern is selected with a probability of 8/100, the first pattern is selected with a probability of 4/100, and the tenth pattern with a probability of 4/100 Is selected, and the fifth pattern is selected with a probability of 4/100.

  Further, in the tenth pattern normal BGM pattern table 222b4, as shown in FIG. 9C, "10" is assigned to the values "0" to "3" of the normal BGM pattern counter 223d, and the normal BGM pattern counter 223d values "4" to "23" are assigned "1", normal BGM pattern counter 223d values "24" to "39" are assigned "9", and normal BGM pattern counter 223d "2" is assigned to the values "40" to "53", "8" is assigned to the values "54" to "65" of the normal BGM pattern counter 223d, and the value "normal" of the normal BGM pattern counter 223d “3” is assigned to 66 ”to“ 75 ”, and“ 7 ”is assigned to the values“ 76 ”to“ 83 ”of the normal BGM pattern counter 223 d. Are assigned, and "4" is assigned to values "84" to "91" of normal BGM pattern counter 223d, and "6" is assigned to values "92" to "95" of normal BGM pattern counter 223d. Normally, "5" is assigned to the values "96" to "99" of the BGM pattern counter 223d.

  That is, when the pattern used in the measure immediately before the measure to be determined is the tenth pattern, the first pattern is selected with a probability of 20/100 as the pattern to be used in the measure to be determined, The ninth pattern is selected with a probability of 16/100, the second pattern is selected with a probability of 14/100, the eighth pattern is selected with a probability of 12/100, and the third pattern is selected with a probability of 10/100 And the seventh pattern is selected with a probability of 8/100, the fourth pattern is selected with a probability of 8/100, the sixth pattern is selected with a probability of 4/100, and the fifth pattern with a probability of 4/100 Is selected, and the tenth pattern is selected with a probability of 4/100.

  Thus, according to the first pattern normal BGM pattern table 222b0, the fifth pattern normal BGM pattern table 222b4, and the tenth pattern normal BGM pattern table 222b9, the bar immediately before the bar to be determined is the first pattern In the case of any of the fifth pattern and the tenth pattern, the closer the rhythm or backing to be used is to the auditory pattern to the rhythm or backing of the pattern used in the preceding measure, It is likely to be determined probabilistically as a pattern used in the measure to be determined. Also in the normal BGM pattern table corresponding to the other patterns, the rhythm or backing used is aurally to the rhythm or backing of the pattern used in the bar immediately preceding the bar to be determined. A pattern number is usually assigned to a possible value of the BGM pattern counter 223d so that the closer the pattern is, the more likely it is determined probabilistically as the pattern to be used in the measure to be determined.

  The rhythm or backing of the pattern used in the bar preceding the bar to be determined that is closer to the auditory pattern is more likely to be used as the pattern used in the bar to be determined By making it easy to determine, it is possible to suppress frequent occurrence of large differences in rhythm and backing across bars. Therefore, even when normal BGM is played back, even if a pattern having different rhythms, backings, etc. is selected for each measure, the normal BGM can be heard as a series of melody.

  On the other hand, each of the first pattern normal BGM pattern table 222b0 to the tenth pattern normal BGM pattern table 222b9 is configured to be capable of determining ten types of patterns of the first pattern to the tenth pattern, and Is determined as the pattern of the measure to be determined even if the rhythm or backing used is a pattern that is acoustically distant from the rhythm or backing of the pattern used in the preceding measure of . In this way, it is possible to form a point at which the rhythm, backing, etc. changes significantly during normal BGM playback, and whether the normal BGM is loop-replayed, the player hears the BGM which will not get tired even if listened to for a long time You can Also, by forming points where the rhythm, backing, etc. change greatly, it is possible to make it easier for the player to usually feel at the BGM.

  Further, each of the first pattern normal BGM pattern table 222b0 to the tenth pattern normal BGM pattern table 222b9 is a pattern to be used in the measure to be determined, and is a bar one before the measure to be determined. The probability that the same pattern as the pattern being used is selected is configured to be the lowest. As a result, when normal BGM is played back, the frequency with which the same rhythm or backing pattern is played back continuously in a plurality of bars is reduced, and the possibility of being played back with different rhythms or backings for each bar is increased. Therefore, it is possible to make the player listen to a more varied melody.

  Note that the probability that each pattern described above in each normal BGM pattern table is selected is just an example, and it is used for the rhythm and backing of the pattern used in the bar immediately before the bar to be determined. If the BGM pattern table is usually configured, each pattern is determined so that the rhythm or backing pattern to be played is more likely to be determined probabilistically as the pattern to be used in the measure to be determined, as the auditory closer pattern is. The probability may be an arbitrary value.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in each normal BGM pattern table, as the pattern used in the measure to be determined, the same pattern as the pattern used in the bar immediately before the measure to be determined is selected The probability of being performed is configured to be the lowest, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The pattern used in the measure to be determined is used in the measure immediately before the measure to be determined. Each normal BGM pattern table may be configured such that the probability that the same pattern as the selected pattern is selected is lower than the probability that some of the other patterns are selected. Also in this case, when normal BGM is played back, the same rhythm or backing pattern is not played back continuously in a plurality of bars, so there is a high possibility of being played with different rhythms or backings for each bar. Thus, it is possible to make the player listen to more various melodies.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the measure to be determined is closer to a pattern whose rhythm or backing used is aurally closer to the rhythm or backing of the pattern used in the measure preceding the measure to be determined. Usually, the case where the BGM pattern table is configured is described so that it is likely to be determined probabilistically as a pattern to be used in S. However, the probability of each pattern determined as the pattern used in the measure to be determined is arbitrary. It may be set. In this case, it may happen that the rhythm and backing greatly differ frequently across the bars, but the player can hear a different pattern every time one loop of normal BGM is played back. It eliminates the feeling that the BGM is looped, makes you feel bored even if you listen to it for a long time, and you can always make the player feel new.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case of preparing the normal BGM pattern table corresponding to each of the first to tenth patterns commonly prepared for the respective bars will be described, but instead, the first to fourth will be described. A normal BGM pattern table corresponding to each of the first to tenth patterns may be prepared for each bar. That is, the first to tenth regular pattern BGM pattern tables for the first bar, the first to tenth regular pattern BGM pattern tables for the second bar, and the first to tenth patterns for the third bar A normal BGM pattern table and first to tenth pattern normal BGM pattern tables for the fourth measure may be prepared. In this case, for the first to tenth patterns corresponding to the bar immediately before the bar to be determined (for example, in the case where the bar to be determined is the first bar, the bar immediately before is the fourth bar) From the BGM pattern table, select the normal BGM pattern table corresponding to the pattern used in the preceding measure, and use the number associated with the value of the normal BGM pattern counter 223d at that time to determine Decide which pattern to use in the measure. Thus, for each of the first to fourth measures, by preparing the normal BGM pattern table corresponding to each of the first to tenth patterns, it is possible to set the probability that each pattern is determined in each measure. it can. Therefore, since it is possible to adjust the frequency at which auditory changes due to changes in rhythm and backing increase between each measure, a pattern different in rhythm, backing, etc. is selected for each measure when normal BGM is played back. Even if it is configured to be played back, the player can normally hear BGM as a series of melodies without a sense of discomfort.

  As described above, instead of the present embodiment, the number of patterns prepared for each measure may be different for each measure, but in this case, each of the first to fourth measures is prepared for that measure. A normal BGM pattern table corresponding to each of the above patterns may be prepared. That is, five patterns of the first to fifth patterns in the first bar, ten patterns of the first to tenth patterns in the second bar, eight patterns of the first to eighth patterns in the third bar, and the fourth bar If there are 12 patterns from the 1st pattern to the 12th pattern, the 1st to 5th pattern normal BGM pattern tables for the 1st bar and the 1st to 10th pattern normal BGM pattern tables for the 2nd bar The first to eighth pattern normal BGM pattern tables for the third bar and the first to twelfth pattern normal BGM pattern tables for the fourth bar may be prepared.

  In this case, each normal BGM pattern table may be configured as follows. That is, in each of the first to fifth pattern normal BGM pattern tables for the first bar, the numbers 1 to 10 indicating the first to tenth patterns are generally used to determine the pattern to be used in the second bar. It is assigned to a possible value of the BGM pattern counter 223d. In each of the first to tenth pattern normal BGM pattern tables for the second bar, the numbers 1 to 8 indicating the first to eighth patterns are normal BGM patterns to determine the pattern to be used in the third bar. It is assigned to a possible value of the counter 223d. In each of the first to eighth pattern normal BGM pattern tables for the third bar, the numbers 1 to 12 indicating the first to twelfth patterns are normal BGM patterns to determine the pattern to be used in the fourth bar It is assigned to a possible value of the counter 223d. In each of the first to twelfth pattern normal BGM pattern tables for the fourth bar, the numbers 1 to 5 indicating the first to fifth patterns are normal BGM patterns to determine the pattern to be used in the first bar It is assigned to a possible value of the counter 223d.

  Using each normal BGM pattern table configured in this way, the normal BGM pattern table corresponding to each pattern prepared in the bar one before the bar to be determined is used in the bar one before that The normal BGM pattern table corresponding to the selected pattern is selected, and the pattern used in the measure to be determined is determined from the number associated with the value of the normal BGM pattern counter 223d at that time, for each measure. Even when the number of patterns prepared for each bar is different for each bar, normal BGM can be reproduced while changing the pattern used for each bar.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, when normal BGM is to be reproduced, the pattern to be used in the measure is determined immediately before the start of the reproduction of the next measure, and the sound output LSI includes the information indicating the determined pattern. Sets the measure playback start. That is, the determination of the pattern to be used in the measure to be reproduced from now is performed immediately before the start of reproduction of the measure. Therefore, the measure immediately before the measure whose pattern is to be determined (that is, the next measure) is the measure currently being reproduced, and the selection of the normal BGM pattern table used to determine the pattern is the measure currently being reproduced. A normal BGM pattern table corresponding to the pattern being used in will be selected.

  However, the determination of the pattern to be used in the measure to be reproduced from now may be at any timing before the start of reproduction of the measure. When the timing of determination of the pattern is performed within a period in which the measure immediately preceding the measure to be determined is being reproduced, the selection of the normal BGM pattern table used for determination of the pattern is the measure currently being reproduced. The normal BGM pattern table corresponding to the pattern being used in the above may be selected. In addition, when the timing of pattern determination is performed within a period in which the bar two bars before the bar to be determined is being played back, selection of the normal BGM pattern table used to determine the pattern is currently being played back. The normal BGM pattern table corresponding to the pattern determined for the next bar of the bar may be selected.

  It should be noted that, when the reproduction of the normal BGM itself is started, when the pattern to be used in the first measure to be reproduced first is determined, the measure one before is not reproduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first pattern normal BGM pattern table 222b0 is selected. However, the normal BGM pattern table corresponding to any pattern may be fixedly selected, or the normal BGM pattern table corresponding to any of the first to tenth patterns may be selected from time to time. If the normal BGM pattern table to be used from time to time is selected, the bias of the selected pattern is suppressed, so that the normal BGM of various patterns can be heard by the player from the start of normal BGM reproduction.

  When the normal BGM pattern table corresponding to each of the first to tenth patterns is prepared for each of the first to fourth bars, it is used in the first bar to be played first at the start of normal BGM playback. When determining a pattern, one normal BGM pattern table may be fixedly selected from among the normal BGM pattern tables corresponding to the first to tenth patterns of the fourth bar, or the fourth bar The normal BGM pattern table corresponding to any one of the first to tenth patterns may be selected from time to time.

  In addition, when determining the pattern to be used in the first measure to be reproduced first when starting the reproduction of the normal BGM itself, any of the first to tenth patterns may be used without using the normal BGM pattern table. The pattern of may be fixedly determined, or may be selected and determined at any time from the first to tenth patterns.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The holding ball number counter 223a is, like the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110, a fluctuation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter which counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuation effect held in the control device 110 up to four times.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 can not directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the value of the holding ball number counter 203 a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of holding balls based on the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of holding balls with the number holding ball counter 223a.

  Specifically, in the case of the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls of the variation effect is added by entering the first entrance ball 64, and the value of the holding ball number counter 203a is added in the main control device 110. When the pending ball number command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received, the value after addition of the pending ball number counter 203 a of the main control unit 110 included in the pending ball number command (ie, pending at the main control unit 110 The stored ball number of the variation effect) is stored in the stored ball number counter 223a (see S2007 in FIG. 23).

  Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the holding ball number counter 203a is decremented in the main control device 110, and along with the reception. When the mode of the variable display in the third symbol display device 81 is set, the value of the holding ball number counter 223a is decremented by 1 (see S2107 in FIG. 24). As described above, since the value of the holding ball number counter 223a is updated according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value can be updated while being synchronized with the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. .

  The value of the holding ball number counter 223a is used to display the holding ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the command for holding ball number in the number-of-holding ball counter 223a, or holds the number ball counter according to reception of the variation pattern command In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the holding ball number counter 223a after storing or updating at the timing of updating the value of 223a, the display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. .

  When the display control device 114 receives this display ball holding number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball number pattern for the value of the holding ball number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled to be displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see S2951 in FIG. 36). As described above, the value of the holding ball number counter 223a is changed while being synchronized with the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The display type flag 223 b is a flag indicating the display type of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 receives the display type command from the display control device 114. The display type command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the display content (display type) to be displayed from now on in the third symbol display device 81. Under normal conditions, the display type flag 223b is set to "off". On the other hand, when the display type command is received from the display control device 114, the display type indicated by the display type command is set in the display type flag 223b (FIG. 25). The display type flag 223b is set to "OFF" as an initial value in the initial value setting process (S1810) of the RAM executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 21) executed at the time of power on.

  When the display type is set in the display type flag 223b, the MPU 221 sets the display type set in the display type flag 223b in the sound editing process (S1907 in FIG. 22) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process. A process of controlling the sound output LSI 301 is executed so as to output a corresponding sound (see FIGS. 26 and 27). Also, in the lamp editing process (S1906 in FIG. 22) performed before the sound editing process in the main process, the lamp display device 227 (electric decoration is displayed corresponding to the display type set in the display type flag 223b. Control is performed to turn on and blink the lamps of the units 29 to 33). Thereby, according to the image displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, the lamp display apparatus 227 can be made to light and blink, or a sound can be output from the audio output apparatus 226.

  The display type flag 223 b is set to “off” when output control of audio corresponding to the set display type is performed in the sound editing process.

  The playback time counter 223c is a counter for counting the playback time of normal BGM and determining whether playback for one bar has been performed. When normal BGM playback start is set, the playback time counter 223c is initialized to “0” (S2314 in FIG. 27). Then, in the counter updating process (S1910) executed every one millisecond in the main process (FIG. 22), the reproduction time counter 223c is incremented by one. That is, the reproduction time counter 223c is incremented by one every one millisecond.

  Then, based on the value of the playback time counter 223c, it is determined whether or not the normal BGM playback has progressed by one bar (S2315 in FIG. 27), and if it is determined that it proceeds by one bar, the bar to be played next The pattern to be used in is determined, and the reproduction start of the determined pattern is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2316 to S2318). Then, the reproduction time counter 223c is again initialized to "0" (S2319), and is incremented by one every one millisecond to count the reproduction time of one bar of normal BGM.

  The reproduction time counter 223c is set to "0" as an initial value in the initial value setting process (S1810) of the RAM which is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 21) executed at the time of power on. However, since the reproduction time counter 223c is normally initialized to "0" when reproduction of BGM is performed, the reproduction time counter 223c may be set to an arbitrary value in the initial value setting process (S1810). Alternatively, the initialization of the reproduction time counter 223c in the initial value setting process may be omitted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the reproduction time counter 223c is initialized to “0” and counted up by 1 every 1 millisecond will be described, but the time interval for counting up may not be every 1 millisecond. Well, it may be at any time interval. Also, the number (width) to be counted up may be arbitrary. Further, instead of counting up, a value corresponding to the reproduction time of one measure may be set in the reproduction time counter 223c, and the value may be counted down at predetermined time intervals, one by one or a predetermined number. Then, when the reproduction time counter 223c reaches "0" or a predetermined number, it may be determined that the normal BGM has advanced by one bar.

  The RAM 223 additionally stores a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control unit 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, and a command received from the display control unit 114 It has a display command storage area (not shown) temporarily stored until a process corresponding to the command is performed, a fluctuation start flag (not shown) indicating whether to start fluctuation display or the like.

  The command storage area and the display command storage area are configured by a ring buffer, and data reading and writing are performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 23) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed. Further, when the display command determination process (see FIG. 25) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the display command storage area is read out and displayed. The command determination processing analyzes the command and performs processing according to the command.

  The change start flag is turned on when the stop type command output from the main control device 110 is received (see S2004 in FIG. 23) and turned off when the setting of the change display in the third symbol display device 81 is made. (See S2102 in FIG. 24).

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol such as fluctuation display (variation effect), etc. The display of the display device 81 is controlled. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Accordingly, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 18) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 has at least an MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input / output port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. doing.

  The audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input / output port 238, and the display control device 114 is a command instructing a mode (display mode) of the effect of the third symbol display device 81 determined by the audio lamp control device 113. Is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and a display type command or the like for notifying display contents to be actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 under the control of the display control device 114 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113.

  The MPU 231, the program ROM 232, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are also connected to the input / output port 238 via the bus line 240. A video RAM 236 is connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. The third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, even if the pachinko machine 10 is another model in which the jackpot lottery probability and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot are different models, the model of the specification with exactly the same symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Since the display control device 114 is a common part, cost reduction is achieved.

  The MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the command input from the audio lamp control device 113. The program ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The program ROM 232 also has at least a display data table storage area 232a and an additional data table storage area 232b.

  The display data table storage area 232 a is an area in which a display data table prepared for each effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110 is stored. The display data table describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time passes in the effect corresponding to the display data table. The MPU 231 specifies an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, and reads a display data table corresponding to the effect from the display data table storage area 232a. Then, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled in accordance with the read display data table.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described. The display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the audio lamp control device 113, and for example, a variable effect, a demonstration effect, A display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect and the restart effect is prepared.

  The demonstration effect is an effect that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next change effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has passed since the one change effect was stopped, While the 3rd design which consists of the main design which does not attach the number of "0" to "9" is stopped-displayed, only a back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The finalized display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the stationary symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the finalization command (display determination command) from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 after the fluctuation effect. It is an effect to be displayed. For example, when the stop design is a design that is out of pattern, an effect that emphasizes the release is performed, and when the stop design is either a 15R probability variation jackpot, a 15R normal jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot, each jackpot is emphasized A presentation is performed. The player can easily judge the game value given by the content of the stop symbol by visually recognizing the finalized display effect.

  The restart effect is a predetermined position between the time when the third symbol is stopped and displayed along with the end of the fluctuation effect indicated by the fluctuation pattern command and the confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. This is an effect of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an image in which the third symbol is vibrated (swayed) around the center. When the player visually recognizes that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the third symbol display is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the stop symbol is not determined at that time. Can be recognized.

  One display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect and the restart effect is stored in the display data table storage area 232a. The fluctuation display data table, which is a display data table for fluctuation effect, is prepared for each table according to the set fluctuation effect pattern. In addition, as a display data table corresponding to a fixed display effect, one that displays off a symbol as a stop symbol and one that displays a definite variation big hit (15R positive variation big hit or 2R positive variation big hit) and a normal big hit (15R normal big hit) And the one to be displayed in a fixed manner are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the display data table for variation among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), light in the image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a person or a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information Since the variable display data table is constant, only the rear surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the rear surface image, is defined. This back surface type is any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (one of the "town stage", "sea stage", and "mountain stage") selected by the player operating the frame button 22. Information for specifying whether to display the image or to display a rear surface image different from the rear surface A to C is described. Moreover, when specifying to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface type is also described together with information specifying which back surface image to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target . On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear surface image different from the rear surface A to C, the rear surface image to be displayed is specified from the rear surface type.

  In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, it is in any state corresponding to the back surface type and the back surface type. It is possible to define display state information indicating whether to display the rear image. The rear image is displayed with the display range, the brightness, the color tone, and the like changing with the passage of time. The display state information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time since the rear surface image in the initial state is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time since the back surface image in the initial state indicated by the display state information is displayed.

  Further, the display state information is information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the image based on the display data table on the third symbol display device 81) is started. May be In this case, the MPU 231 starts drawing the image based on the display data table (or displaying the image based on the display data table on the third symbol display device 81) of the back image to be displayed for that frame. Based on the state of the back image displayed at the stage and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the display state information (or the display of the image on the third symbol display device 81) is started Identify.

  Furthermore, the display state information includes information indicating an elapsed time since the back surface image corresponding to the initial state is displayed according to the back surface type and drawing of an image based on the display data table (or an image based on the display data table It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of display on the third symbol display device 81), and the type information of the display state information (along with the back type and the display state information ( For example, it is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed, or the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 of the image based on the display data table) The information indicating whether the information indicates the elapsed time since the start of the display) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the display state information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), a unique identification number assigned to the third symbol is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. In this embodiment, a unique identification number for identifying each of the third symbols is given to each one of the third symbols. For example, the main symbol of “0” is attached with “0” as an identification number, the main symbol of “1” is attached with “1” as an identification number, and the main symbol of “2” is attached as an identification number 2 is attached.

  In addition, as the symbol type information of the third symbol from the start of the change to the passage of a predetermined time, the identification information of the third symbol is not directly defined, but the stop of the change effect performed one before Offset information with the identification number of the symbol is described. The offset information is information representing the difference between the identification numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

  The offset information is defined as the symbol type information of the third symbol from the start of the change to the passage of a predetermined time. The display of the third symbol in the change effect is the change effect performed one time ago It is because it changes according to the stop symbol. From the start of the change to the passage of a predetermined time, as symbol type information in each address, the stop information of the change effect performed one time ago with the identification information of the third symbol to be displayed at the time corresponding to that address The difference (offset information) with the identification information of Thereby, change production can be started from the stop pattern in the last change production.

  Further, as symbol type information of the third symbol after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, offset information with the identification number of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed is described. The stop symbol of the fluctuation effect is the stop type indicated by the display stop type command by receiving the display stop type command from the voice lamp control device 113 in the display control device 114 (15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, 15R It is usually determined based on the jackpot, the back and forth reach, the non-back and forth reach, and the complete out). The display control device 114 is described by describing offset information with the identification number of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed as symbol type information of the third symbol after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation. The fluctuation effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 such that the third symbol is stop displayed (confirmed display) with the stop symbol set each time based on the display stop type command.

  In addition, as the symbol type information, from the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, the third symbol is fast for the predetermined time to be switched to the identification number of the third symbol to be actually displayed. It is set to be the time displayed in a fluctuating manner. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  In the display data table, in addition to the drawing content, the display content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from now on is defined at a part of the addresses. For example, in the case of displaying high-speed fluctuation, “high-speed fluctuation display” is defined as display content, and in the case of displaying a girl character image, “girl character display” is defined as display content, and a light emission effect image is displayed. In the case where the display is to be performed, "light emission effect display" is defined as the display content. When normal reach is displayed, “normal reach” is defined as the display content, together with the type of the normal reach. When super reach is displayed, "super reach" is specified as the display content together with the type of the super reach. In the case of displaying the special reach, as the display content, "special reach" is defined together with the type of the special reach.

  The display control device 114 generates a display type command for notifying the display content (display type) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display content defined in the display data table, and the voice lamp control device Send to 113.

  The start address of the display data table "0000H" describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 11) describes the data table. "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The selected display data table is read out from the display data table storage area 232a and stored in a display data table buffer 233a described later provided in the work RAM 233, and the pointer 233c is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233c is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is subsequently selected based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233c. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 13) to be described later is created. By transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order of the addresses defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233c, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If the display content is defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233c, a display type command representing the display content (display type) is generated according to the display content, and the display type command is sent to the audio lamp control device 113. Send. As a result, the display content (display type) of the third symbol display device 81 is notified to the sound lamp control device 113. In the audio lamp control device 113, control is performed to output, from the audio output device 226, an audio that matches the display content notified by the display type command.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. What can be created is for the pachinko machine 10 to determine the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in the game machine etc. excluding game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents can not be predicted, and therefore, as described above A display data table corresponding to each effect mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Returning to FIG. 10, the description will be continued. The additional data table storage area 232b is an area for storing an additional data table which defines the display content of the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the one effect based on the command from the main control device 110 is there. In the additional data table storage area 232b, an additional data table is prepared and stored for each effect to be displayed additionally.

  Here, "adding to one effect" means changing the display content of one effect based on a command from the main control unit 110, and for example, an image not normally displayed in one effect The concept of overlapping and displaying another effect on the one effect, changing the color tone of part or all of the one effect, or changing the image displayed in the one effect It is included.

  That is, the additional data table is a drawing content necessary for adding and displaying an image which is not usually displayed with respect to one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 110 Or, the drawing contents necessary for changing the color tone of a part or all of the one effect, and the drawing contents necessary for changing and displaying the image displayed in the one effect are defined. It is.

  The details of the additional data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the additional data table. In the additional data table, the contents (drawing contents) of the image for one frame to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address are defined in detail in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object to be additionally displayed in an image for one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information, is defined.

  In the example of FIG. 12, the sprite type (character type: first role) is associated with one character (character 1: corresponding to the image of a movable combination) in association with the address "0097H" defined in the display data table. Items, second characters, etc.), display position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information, filter specification information are defined. On the other hand, if there is no display item to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, it means that there is no additional display item to be added corresponding to the address in the additional data table. Null data is defined (address “0001H” in FIG. 12 corresponds).

  In addition, as the display content defined by the additional data table, for example, with respect to the fluctuation effect displayed by the fluctuation display data table selected based on the fluctuation pattern command (display fluctuation pattern command) from the main control device 110 The additional data table defines the display content for displaying the preview effect image, which is displayed additionally.

  Further, in the additional data table, similarly to the display data table, in addition to the above-described drawing contents, the display contents of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be defined at some addresses. For example, in the case of additionally displaying a notice effect using "fish school", "fish school" may be defined as the display content.

  As in the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the additional data table, and the final address of the additional data table (in the example of FIG. In “)”, “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the additional data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 receives a command from the audio lamp control device 113, and when it is determined that the effect is to be displayed by adding the received command to the effect whose display has been started earlier, the effect corresponding to the effect is added. The added data table is read out from the added data table storage area 232 b and stored in the added data table buffer 233 b of the work RAM 233 described later.

  Then, every time the pointer 233c is updated, the display content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233c is selected from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. The image contents to be drawn next are specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 13) to be described later is created.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 12, when the pointer 233g becomes "0097H", the MPU 231 is defined by the various sprites defined by the address "0097H" of the display data table by the address "0097H" of the additional data table. The sprite of character 1 is added to create a drawing list, and the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image. On the other hand, when the pointer 233c is "0001H", since the null data is defined at the address "0001H" of the additional data table, it is judged that there is no display object to be added, and the address "display data table" The drawing list is generated based on the various sprites defined in “0001H”.

  Further, in the additional data table, when the information defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233c is "End" information, and when the pointer 233c indicates an address not defined in the additional data table (for example, In the example of FIG. 12, it is determined that the display object to be added does not exist even when the pointer 233c indicates an address after “00 FEH”, and drawing is performed based on various sprites defined in the display data table. Generate a list.

  Then, by transmitting the generated drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction for drawing the image is issued. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233c, and the drawing contents defined in the additional data table are added, so that the display data table and the additional data table An image as specified is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, when the display content is defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c, a display type command representing the display content (display type) is generated and the display is performed. The type command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Thereby, the display content (display type) of the effect to be additionally displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is notified to the sound lamp control device 113. In the audio lamp control device 113, control is performed to output, from the audio output device 226, an audio that matches the display content notified by the display type command.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 should display the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command or the like from the main control device 110. When being added to the effect image (for example, the variation effect image) and displaying another effect image (for example, an image imitating the first feature), the addition corresponding to the other effect image to be additionally displayed By setting the data table in the additional data table buffer 233b, the effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed. Thus, for example, when there are 32 types of original effect images and there are 2 types of other effect images to be displayed additionally, temporarily displaying an image in which another effect image is defined for each of the original effect images If a data table is prepared separately, 32 × (1 + 2) = 96 kinds of display data tables must be prepared, but like the pachinko machine 10, data tables corresponding to other effect images are used as additional data tables. By separately defining, 32 + 2 = 34 types of displays and additional data tables may be prepared, and the capacity increase of the ROM 232 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to store data tables corresponding to a variety of presentation modes in the capacity prepared in the ROM 232, and it is possible to easily achieve further diversification of presentation images.

  Further, as in the pachinko machine 10, by setting another effect image to be additionally displayed as an additional data table, after setting a display data table corresponding to the original effect image in the display data table buffer 233a, Even when it is determined to display another effect image to be additionally displayed, an additional data table corresponding to the other effect image is added without changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a. Only by setting in the data table buffer 233b, another effect image to be additionally displayed can be added to the original effect image and easily displayed.

  Also, since the additional data table is configured to have the same data structure as the display data table, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data set in the additional data table buffer 233b From the table, while updating the pointer 233c every time, it is possible to easily specify the drawing contents defined in the address indicated by the pointer, and from these, it is easy to make one drawing list corresponding to one frame Can be generated. Therefore, in addition to the effect performed based on the command from the main control device 110, even if the display of other effects is determined by the audio lamp control device 113 or the like, the effect to be displayed additionally By defining the display content in the additional data table, various effects can be easily displayed from a small number of data tables.

  Returning to FIG. 10, the description will be continued. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. The work RAM 233 at least includes a display data table buffer 233a, an additional data table buffer 223b, a pointer 233c, a drawing list area 233d, and a clock counter 233e.

  The display data table buffer 233a stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 113 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the display data table storage area 223a. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233a.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233c one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233c. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 13) in which the contents of the image drawing instruction for the image is described is generated. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, effects corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a are displayed.

  When the display content is defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c, a display type command representing the display content (display type) is generated, and the display type command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. As a result, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 is notified to the sound lamp control device 113. In the audio lamp control device 113, control is performed to output, from the audio output device 226, an audio that matches the display content notified by the display type command.

  The additional data table buffer 233 b is displayed in addition to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 a according to the command from the audio lamp control device 113. It is a buffer for storing an additional data table corresponding to an effect. By storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233a, the MPU 231 temporarily writes null data, which means that there is no display item to be additionally displayed in the additional data table buffer 233b. Clear the contents.

  Thereafter, based on a command from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 causes the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a to be displayed in addition to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If there is an effect to judge the presence / absence and to be additionally displayed, an additional data table corresponding to the effect mode is selected from the data table storage area 233b, and the selected additional data table is added to the additional data table buffer 233b. Store.

  Then, while adding the pointer 233c one by one, the MPU 231 stores in the additional data table buffer 233b the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. In the additional data table, based on the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233c, a drawing list (see FIG. 13) described later is described in which the contents of the image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 are described for each frame. . Thereby, the effect corresponding to the additional data table is added and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  Also, in the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, when the display content is defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c, a display type command representing the display content (display type) is generated, and The display type command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Thereby, the display content (display type) of the effect to be additionally displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is notified to the sound lamp control device 113. In the audio lamp control device 113, control is performed to output, from the audio output device 226, an audio that matches the display content notified by the display type command.

  Further, when the additional data table is not stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, since the additional data table buffer 233b stores the null data, the third symbol display device 81 has an effect corresponding to the display data table Is displayed as it is.

  The pointer 233 c is for designating an address to obtain the corresponding drawing content from the display data table and the additional data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233 a and the additional data table buffer 233 b. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233c to 0, as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a. Then, in the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237, the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. The update process is executed (S2905 in FIG. 34, see FIG. 37), and the value of the pointer 233c is incremented by one (see S2981 in FIG. 37).

  The MPU 231 determines the address indicated by the pointer 233c from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b each time the pointer 233c is updated. The drawing contents specified in are specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 13) described later is created.

  Thereby, when the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, An effect corresponding to the additional data table can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. .

  In addition, in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233, when the display content is defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c, the display content A display type command representing (display type) is generated, and the display type command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. Thereby, the display content (display type) of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is notified to the sound lamp control device 113. In the audio lamp control device 113, control is performed to output, from the audio output device 226, an audio that matches the display content notified by the display type command.

  Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  The drawing list area 233 d is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233 b. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 13, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third pattern (symbol 1, 1 ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite, such as a design.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite describes an address at which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the image controller 237 is a character described later provided in the character ROM 234. The image data of the sprite is acquired from the memory area designated by the address of the storage area 234a. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read out from the ROM 234 is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and is semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing is performed, synthesis processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the method specified by the information according to filter specification information Above, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded on the video RAM 236 by the image controller 237.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233, the MPU 231 displays the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233c and the other images to be drawn. Detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on the contents of (for example, a reserved image for displaying a reserved ball number pattern, a warning image for notifying occurrence of an error, etc.) While creating the drawing list by rearranging the detailed information for each sprite.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage address of the data of the sprite (display object) is the sprite type specified in the display data table and the additional data table, or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the character storage area 234a in which the image data of the sprite is stored is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 immediately determines the address at which the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type. The information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 displays a display data table and additional data for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy the information specified in the table as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) The detailed information corresponding to the respective sprites is described in the order of the characters (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number pattern 1, holding ball number pattern 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be placed on the foreground side.

  Returning to FIG. 10, the description will be continued. The clock counter 233e is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233a. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process (FIG. Each time the display setting process (see S2603 and FIG. 34) is executed, the clock counter 233e is decremented by one (S2907). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233e becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  The character ROM 234 is provided with a character storage area 234a in which image data of each sprite such as a symbol (background symbol or decorative symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. In the character storage area 234a, the above-described image data is stored as data in a compression format in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In the present embodiment, the image data before compression is composed of about 1024 Mbytes, and the image data of about 1024 Mbytes is compressed to about 768 Mbytes and stored in the character storage area 234a.

  The video RAM 236 is a memory having two frame buffer areas for storing an image of one frame displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The image controller 236 generates image data of one frame according to the drawing list and writes the image data to one frame buffer area of the video RAM 236 and also writes one frame of image data written to the other frame buffer area of the video RAM 236 Is read out, and the read out image data is output to the third symbol display device 81 through the output port 239 so that a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The image controller 237 reads the image data (image data of a compression format) of the sprite specified in the drawing list from the character storage area 234a in the order described in the drawing list, decompresses the image data, and then draws the image data. Processing is performed in accordance with the drawing information defined in the list, and the image data of the sprite is written in one frame buffer area of the video RAM at the display position coordinates specified in the drawing list. By decompressing, processing, and writing image data for all sprites defined in the drawing list, image data to be displayed in one frame is generated.

  The writing of one frame of image data into one frame buffer area and the reading of one frame of image data from the other frame buffer area are performed in parallel, and both complete in 20 milliseconds. Then, when reading of image data of one frame from the other frame buffer area is completed, reading of image data of one frame previously written from one of the frame buffer areas is subsequently performed. Image data for the next one frame is written to the frame buffer area of

  Thus, a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by alternately writing the image data and reading the image data of one frame buffer area and the other frame buffer area. It can be displayed.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 14 to 20. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon turning on the power, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (in this embodiment, in a cycle of 2 ms). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Here, for convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the start-up process and the main process will be described.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S1101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the counter buffer 203b of the RAM 203. Similarly, when the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1 and the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the counter buffer 203 b of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S1103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the second random number counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 899, 99, 99, 250), each clears to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

  Next, a process for performing display by the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S1104), and then, the first ball entrance The start winning process associated with the winning to 64 is executed (S1105). The details of the fluctuation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 15 and 17, respectively.

  After the start winning process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S1106), and the other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S1107), and the timer interrupt process is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and firing the ball on condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process to determine the on / off of the The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the variation process (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing this variation process (S1104). This fluctuation process (S1104) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 14), and controls fluctuation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is currently occurring (S1201). The jackpot includes the middle of a jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. If the result of the determination is that the jackpot is in progress (S1201: Yes), the present processing is ended as it is.

  If the jackpot is not inside (S1201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S1202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S1202: No) Then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation display in the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S1203). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped (S1203: No), the present processing ends. As a result, the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 only for a predetermined time, so the player can be made to visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1203, if the predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation stop (S1203: Yes), the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (the holding ball number N of the fluctuation display being held in the main controller 110) Is judged to be larger than 0 (S1204), and if the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (the holding ball number N) is 0 (S1204: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (holding ball number N) is larger than 0 as a result of the process of S1204 (S1204: Yes), the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (holding ball number N) is decremented by one. (S1205), shift processing is performed on the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c (S1206). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the pending first to fourth areas of the pending ball storage area 203c toward the execution area, ie, pending first area → execution area, pending second area → The data in each area is shifted in such a way that the first area for holding, the third area for holding, the second area for holding, the second area for holding, and the third area for holding. After the data shift process, the variation start process of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1207), and the variation process is ended. The change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the process of S1202 that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether a changing time has elapsed (S1210). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time has elapsed If not (S1210: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S1211), and this processing is ended.

  In this embodiment, of the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off until the fluctuation time elapses from when the fluctuation is started. Simultaneously turn on the green LED, and if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED; if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED At the same time, a display mode for lighting the red LED is set.

  The variation process is executed every two milliseconds, but if the illumination color of the LED is changed each time the variation process is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the illumination color of the LED. Therefore, the counter (not shown) is incremented by one each time the fluctuation processing is executed so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 200 when the counter reaches 200. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S1210: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1212). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by the variation start process (S1207) described later with reference to FIG. That is, according to the process of S1206, whether or not a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203c is determined. The pattern that becomes the 15R probability variation big hit after the big hit by the value of the counter C2 (the probability change big hit that the maximum round number shifts to high probability state after 15 round hits) or 2R probability variation big hit (high round number is high probability status after 2 round big hits) It is determined whether the symbol to be converted to a probability variation jackpot) or the symbol to be a 15R normal jackpot (the maximum round number is a jackpot to shift to a low probability state after 15 round jackpots).

  In this embodiment, the blue LED is turned on when the jackpot becomes a 15R probability variation jackpot after the big hit, the red LED is turned on when the 2R probability variation jackpot is reached, and the red LED and the blue LED when the 15R normal jackpot is hit Turn on the LED. In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what is made to light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S1212, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect of the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. In order to make the decision, a decision command is set (S1213), and this processing ends. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, it transmits the confirmation command to the display control device 114 as it is. The third symbol display device 81 stops the variation when the variation time has elapsed, and the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined by receiving the confirmation command.

  Next, the variation start process (S1207) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S1207). This fluctuation start process (S1207) is executed in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 15) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and is stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203c by the process of S1206 of the fluctuation process. Based on the values of the various counters, while making a "big hit" or "out" lottery (decision determination), the production pattern of the fluctuation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 (variation effect pattern To determine).

  In the change start process, first, a lottery (permission determination) process is performed to determine whether or not a big hit based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203c (S1301). Whether or not the jackpot is determined is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the game state at that time. As described above, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state, "7, 307, 582" associated with the "low probability state" in the big hit random number table 202a becomes the big hit random number value and the pachinko machine When the ten gaming states are in the high probability state, “28, 58, 85, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, corresponding to the“ high probability state ”in the jackpot random number table 202a. 322, 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 596, 618, 681, 716, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "are the jackpot random number values. In the process of S1301, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203c is compared with these jackpot random number values, and if they match, the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot Determine.

  Then, when it is determined as a big hit as a result of the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203c, The display mode is set (S1302). In this process, the jackpot type set by the first jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b, that is, the maximum round number shifts to a high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots, or the maximum round number is 2 Display mode of the first symbol display device 37 based on whether 2R probability variation jackpot to shift to high probability state after big hit of round or 15R normal big hit to shift to low probability state after 15 round big hits The lighting state of the LED 37a is set. In addition, based on the transition state after the big hit, the big hit type (15R positive variation big hit, 2R positive variation big hit, 15R normal big hit) is a stop type in order to stop and display the big hit symbols corresponding to various big hits in the third symbol display device 81 Set as

  Next, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) at the time of jackpot is determined (S1303). The determination of the fluctuation pattern is performed based on the jackpot type set in the process of S1302, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202c. When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S1303, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set.

  If it is determined that the jackpot is not a jackpot in the process of S1301 (S1301: No), a display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S1304). In the process of S1304, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and set to the display mode corresponding to the symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203c. As the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether it is a front or back outreach, a reach other than back or forth out, or a complete out. In the present embodiment, as described above, the table is set so that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is different depending on whether the state is the high probability state or the low probability state. There is.

  Next, a fluctuation pattern at the time of out of step is determined (S1305). This variation pattern is determined by the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability state, time in the middle, or low probability state excluding time in the middle), the stop type set in the process of S1302, the change type counter CS1 It is carried out based on the value of and the out-of-variation fluctuation pattern table 202d. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1305, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set.

  When the process of S1303 or the process of S1305 is finished, a variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 of the variation pattern type determined in the process of S1303 or S1305 is set (S1306). Next, a stop type command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S1302 or S1304 is set (S1307). Then, the variation start process is ended.

  The variation pattern command and the stop type command set by the processes of S1306 and S1307 are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 20), these commands are voice It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113.

  Next, the start winning process (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S1105). The start winning process (S1105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) to determine whether or not the first ball entrance 64 has a winning (start winning), and if there is a starting winning , Hold processing of values indicated by various random number counters.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S1401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S1401: Yes), the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (the holding ball number N of the fluctuation effect being held in the main controller 110) is It is determined whether it is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S1402). Then, there is no winning at the first ball entry 64 (S1401: No), or even if there is a winning at the first ball entering 64, if the number of holding balls is not N <4 (S1402: No), Return to timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is a winning on the first entrance 64 (S1401: Yes) and the number of holding balls N <4 (S1402: Yes), the value of the holding ball number counter 203a (holding ball number N) 1 is added (S1403), and further, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is read out from the counter buffer 203b of the RAM 203 The storage area 203c is stored in the first area among the free storage areas in the storage area 203c (S1404).

  Next, a pending ball count command including the pending ball count N updated by the process of S1403 is created (S1405), the created pending ball count command is set (S1406), and the start winning process is ended, and the timer split is performed. Return to loading process. This holding ball number command is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 20). The sound lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls in the sound lamp control device 113 based on the number of holding balls N included in the number of balls holding command.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1501), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The NMI interrupt process described above is also executed by the payout and emission control device 311 in the same manner, and the NMI interrupt process causes the RAM 213 to store power-off occurrence information in the RAM 213. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 19, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S1601). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1604), and if it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process proceeds to S1611. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605), and if not stored (S1605: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S1611 also in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S1611. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the process of S1712 of FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1611, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1611). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the gaming ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization process (S1612, S1613) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S1612, S1613) of the RAM 203 is executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1612), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1613). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1610.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S1605: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S1604: Yes) S1607: Yes), while holding the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S1608). Next, a payout recovery command at power recovery for returning the payout control device 111 to the gaming state at the time of driving power supply interruption is transmitted (S1609), and the process shifts to the processing of S1610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  In the process of S1610, an interrupt is permitted (S1610). And, it shifts to the main processing which it mentions later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As a summary, each process of S1701 to S1705 is executed as a periodic process of 4 ms cycle, and the counter update process of S1708 and S1709 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14), each control device on the sub side (peripheral control The external output processing to be sent to is executed (S1701). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S1101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the acquired ball number. Send an award ball command. Further, the ball holding ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 17) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the determination command and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer 203b of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1703), and then, the special winning opening of the variable winning device 65 (large opening) Opening) A large opening opening and closing process is performed to open or close the opening 65a (S1704). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has passed or whether the specified winning opening 65a has a prescribed number of balls. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, display control processing of a second symbol (for example, a symbol of “o” or “x”) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1705). Simply stated, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67, the second random number counter C4 value is acquired at the timing when it passes and the second symbol display device 83 The second symbol variation display is carried out. Then, the second lottery is conducted based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is hit, the electrically operated combination attached to the first ball entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

  Thereafter, it is judged whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main processing (S1707) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1707: Yes), the process proceeds to S1701, and the above-described processes from S1701 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main processing (S1707: No), the first main processing is performed until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the next main processing execution timing is reached. (1) Update of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1708, S1709).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1708). Specifically, each of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in the present embodiment). Do. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer 203b of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1702 (S1709). After the process of S1709, the process returns to the process of S1706.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1701 to S1705 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1706, if the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 18 has been executed, so that the process at the time of the power-off after S1710 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is prohibited (S1710), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1711). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1712), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1713), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1706 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1701 to S1705, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1708 and S1709 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1701. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S1701. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting the value to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1701. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 21, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is performed upon power-on (S1801). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S1918 (see FIG. 22) is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called "temporary power failure"). It is determined whether or not it is started during the execution of (S 1802). As described later with reference to FIG. 22, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1915 in FIG. 22), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off processing of S1918. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1918 is being executed can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S1802: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S1918 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1803).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of “55 AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1803: Yes), the process proceeds to S1804 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1803: No), the process proceeds to S1808.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. From the above, it is judged that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1803: Yes), and the process shifts to S1804. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S1918 after a momentary power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When it is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1803: No), and the process moves to S1808.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1802: Yes), the current start-up process is performed after the instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S1918, the audio lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since the control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1804 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1804, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1804). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1805: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1806). Transfer to processing. By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not.

  On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1805: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S1808, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-down process of S1918 is performed (see S1917 in FIG. 22). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1918 is executed, the process of S1808 when the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1918 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each processing of the audio lamp control device 113 (S1809), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1810). The permission is set (S1811), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S1808 when the power-off flag is off is that, for example, the current startup processing has been started after the power has been completely shut off, and thus the processing of S1804 to S1806 is performed. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: No), S1809, which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1810, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1810), and interrupt permission is set. Then (S1811), the process proceeds to the main processing.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1809 is that, when the process of S1808 is reached via the processes of S1804 to S1806, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1804, If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, it is first determined whether 1 ms or more has elapsed since the processing of S1901 was executed last time (S1901), and if 1 ms or more has not elapsed (S1901: No), S1902 The processing shifts to the processing of S1911 without performing the processing of S1910.

  In the process of S1901, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed since S1902 to S1910 are processes relating to display, lamp, and audio settings (that is, settings for effects), and editing is performed in a short cycle (within 1 ms) Because there is no need to On the other hand, it is preferable to execute the variation display process of S1911 and the command determination process of S1912 in a short cycle. Since the process of S1912 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent reception omission of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1911 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process Setting based on the above can be performed without delay.

  When the process of S1901 is executed for the first time after the start of the main process and the execution of the main process is started, the process directly proceeds to the process of S1902 without determining whether 1 millisecond or more has elapsed. Alternatively, after the start-up process, if the process of S1901 is executed for the first time after the execution of the main process is started, the process may proceed to the process of S1902 assuming that one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1901.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1901 (S1901: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set in the processes of S1903 to S1912 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114. Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1906 described later (S1903). (S1904). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 (power The decorative portions 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc.) are performed. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S1905 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring and effect process is executed (S1905). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player of the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  When the frame button 22 is pressed during a period in which the variable effect is not executed or during a high speed change period, processing for changing the stage is performed, and a rear surface image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the stage. Processing to change to is performed.

  In addition, when the advance notice character appears at the start of the variable display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during reach production produces a sense of expectation for the jackpot. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be set as a decision button for selecting one reach effect among a plurality of reach effects. When the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S1905 is omitted.

  In addition, when the effect requiring the operation of the frame button 22 is performed in the fluctuation effect, the process of counting the number of times the frame button 22 is operated using the frame button operation number counter 223f is also the frame button input monitoring · Performed in the rendering process. As a result, the fact that the frame button 22 has been operated is stocked by the number of frame button operations 223f. The operation of the frame button 22 stocked here is used to output an operation sound notifying that the frame button 22 has been operated, in accordance with the beat of BGM.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process (S1905) is ended, a lamp editing process is executed next (S1906), and then a sound editing process is executed (S1907). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set according to the display type command from the display control device 113 so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing process, the audio data is decoded according to the display type command from the display control device 113 so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the decoded sound is output from the audio output device 226. The sound output LSI 301 is controlled. Further, when the output of the alarm sound is set, the sound output LSI 301 may be controlled such that the alarm sound is output from the sound output device 226 by the sound editing process. The details of the sound editing process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the process of S1907, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1909). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S1906 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing process of S1907 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81. After the process of S1909, a counter update process is executed (S1910), and the process proceeds to the process of S1911. In the counter updating process, various counters (except the normal BGM pattern counter 223d) used by the MPU 221 such as the reproduction time counter 223c and the detailed variation pattern determination counter 223e are updated.

  For example, the update of the detailed change pattern determination counter 223e is performed by sequentially adding one by one within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in the present embodiment), and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (99). Further, updating of the reproduction time counter 223c is performed by adding one.

  In the process of S1911, in order to display the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is sent to the display control device 114. The variable display process, which is a process of temporarily storing for transmission, is executed. The details of the variation display process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variation display process, the command determination process is performed to perform the process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S1912). Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the command determination process, next, a command received from the display control device 114 is determined, and a display command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command (S1913). Details of the display command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the display command determination process is completed, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1915). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1915 (S1915: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S1917), and the power-off process is executed (S1918). After execution of the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1919), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the occurrence information of the power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of the power-off is not stored in the process of S1915 (S1915: No), it is judged whether the RAM 223 is destroyed or not based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1916). If not (S1916: No), the process returns to S1901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1916: Yes), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

  Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Further, the sound output from the sound output device 226 does not change, and the lighting / blinking of the lamp of the lamp display device 227 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the command determination processing (S1912) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1912). This command determination process (S1912) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. . Further, this process also determines the start of the continuous advance notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 when the ball holding ball number command is received from the main control device 110.

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main control apparatus 110 among unprocessed commands is read out from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control apparatus 110. It is determined whether or not it has been made (S2001). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2001: Yes), the fluctuation pattern type (any of fluctuation AF, 2R fluctuation) is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S2002), and the process returns to the main processing. .

  The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and a detailed variation pattern is determined based on the stored variation pattern type in a variation display process (see FIG. 24) described later. Then, the detailed variation pattern determined here is notified to the display control device 114 by the variation pattern command for display, and the third symbol display device 81 produces a variation effect according to the notified detailed variation pattern. To be done.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S2001: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2003). When it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S2003: Yes), the fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2004), and the stop type indicated by the stop type command is extracted. It is stored in the RAM 223 (S2005).

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S2003: No), it is then determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S2006). When it is determined that the holding ball number command has been received (S2006: Yes), the value of the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the holding ball number command (ie, held by the main control device 110) The number of balls held for variation presentation) is extracted, and this is stored in the number of balls held counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2007).

  Here, since the holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball wins (start winning) at the first ball entrance 64, the processing of S2008 is performed every time there is a starting winning. The value of the holding ball number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the holding ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise etc. The value of the holding ball number counter 223a can be corrected and adjusted to the value of the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control unit 110.

  Further, after the processing of S2007, a display holding sphere number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the holding sphere number counter 223a updated by the processing of S2007 is set (S2008). Thus, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the number-of-held-balls number design according to the number of held balls. After the processing of S2008, the processing returns to the main processing.

  As a result of the process of S2006, when it is determined that the hold ball number command has not been received (S2006: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process according to the received command is executed. Then (S2011), it shifts to the main processing. For example, if the other command is a command used by the audio lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to that command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if it is a command used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed control The command is set to be sent to the device 114. The demo command and the confirmation command received from the main control device 110 are set as a display demonstration command and a display confirmation command by the processing of S2011, and are transmitted to the display control device 114. Further, when the power-off command has been received from the main control device 110, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 223.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the variation display process (S1911) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this variation display process (S1911).

  This fluctuation display process (S1911) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, displays fluctuation effects in the third symbol display device 81. A display stop type for generating a display change pattern command based on the change pattern command received from the main control unit 110 and transmitting the stop type extracted from the stop type command to the display control unit 114. It is processing to generate a command. Further, the value of the holding ball number counter 223a is updated according to the display of the variation effect, and a display holding ball number command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the updated holding ball number.

  In the fluctuation display process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2101). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, off) (S2101: No), since the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are not received from main controller 110, this is the case. The variable display process is ended, and the process returns to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is on (S2101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S2102), and then extracted from the fluctuation pattern command in the process of S2002 of the command determination process (see FIG. 23). The variation pattern type (one of the variations A to F and 2R variation) in the variation effect and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command in the process of S2005 are acquired from the RAM 223 (S2103).

  Then, the value of the detailed change pattern determination counter 223e is read out, and the value of the detailed change pattern determination counter 223e, the change pattern type and the stop type acquired from the processing of S2103, and the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (normal state, A detailed change pattern is determined based on the probability change state or the short time state) and the detailed change pattern determination table 222a (S2104).

  Although the fluctuation pattern type notified from the main controller 110 by the fluctuation pattern command is defined only for the fluctuation time, one of various detailed fluctuation patterns prepared for the fluctuation time by this S2104 is 1 One variation pattern is selected, and the selected variation pattern is determined as a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed from now on.

  In addition, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, stop type indicated by the stop type command received so far (15R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth outreach, completely out), It can be judged based on the number of changes.

  For example, in the stop type command corresponding to a certain fluctuation effect, when the 15R probability variation jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot is indicated as the stop classification, after the jackpot effect after the variation production, the pachinko machine 10 until the jackpot next time It is determined that the gaming state is a definite change state. In addition, when 15R normal jackpot is indicated as the stop type in the stop type command corresponding to a certain fluctuation effect, after the jackpot effect after the fluctuation effect, until 100 fluctuation effects are performed, or the next big hit Until it becomes, it is determined that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a time saving state. Then, after 100 times of the variable effects, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is determined to be the normal state until the next big hit.

  Further, the ending command (command for performing an effect indicating the end of the big hit) transmitted from the main control unit 110 at the end of the big hit includes the gaming state (probable variation state or time saving state) of the pachinko machine 10 after the big hit. The voice lamp control device 113 may determine the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 from the gaming state included in the ending command. At this time, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 after the jackpot included in the ending command is a time saving state, the time until 100 variation effects are performed is made a time saving state, and thereafter, until the next big hit Judge as normal condition.

  When the detailed variation pattern is determined in the process of S2104, then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the determined detail variation pattern to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is displayed control device 114. The data is temporarily stored (set) in the RAM 223 for transmission (S2105). In addition, a stop type command for display is generated to notify the display control unit 114 of the stop type acquired by the processing of S2103, and the command is temporarily stored in the RAM 223 for transmission to the display control unit 114 ( The setting is performed (S2106). Here, the command stored (set) in the RAM 223 is transmitted to the display control device 114 in S1902 of the main process (FIG. 22).

  The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display apparatus 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Start the display control of the fluctuation effect. In addition, when the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, it selects a stop symbol that matches the stop type, and when displaying the change effect started by the display change pattern command, the display Display the selected stop symbol.

  Then, according to the setting of the display fluctuation pattern command, the value of the holding ball number counter 223a is decreased by 1 in accordance with the consumption of the holding ball (that is, the setting of the fluctuation display corresponding to the holding ball is performed). (S2107), temporarily store (set) the display pending ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the pending ball number indicated by the value of the updated holding ball number counter 223a to the RAM 223 ( S2108), return to the main processing. Here, the command stored (set) in the RAM 223 is transmitted to the display control device 114 in S1902 of the main process (FIG. 22).

  The display control device 114 executes a process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the number-of-held-balls number pattern according to the number of held balls indicated by the number-of-held-cells-for-display command. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of the balls held by counting the number of the held balls number symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the display command determination process (S1913) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this display command determination process (S1913). In the display command determination process (S1913), as described above, the command received from the display control device 114 is determined, and the process corresponding to the received command is performed. The details of the display command determination process will be described below.

  In the display command determination process, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the display control device 114 is read out and analyzed from the display control command storage area provided in the RAM 223, and the display type command is displayed from the display control device 110. Is determined (S2201). Then, when it is determined that the display type command has been received (S2201: Yes), the display contents (display type) to be displayed from now on in the third symbol display device 81 are extracted from the received display type command The type is set in the display type flag 223b (S2202). Then, the processing returns to the main processing.

  As the display type set in the display type flag 223b (that is, the display type indicated by the display type command), for example, high speed fluctuation, left symbol row Z1 stop, right symbol row Z1 stop, normal reach, super reach, special reach , Final display etc. When the display type is set to the display type flag 223b by the process of S2202, the display content displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is obtained by the sound editing process (S1907) described later with reference to FIGS. Control for outputting voice from the voice output device 226 is executed.

  If it is determined that the display type command has not been received as a result of the process of S2201 (S2201: No), it is then determined whether another command has been received from the display control device 114 (S2203). As a result, if another command is received (S2203: Yes), processing according to the received other command is executed (S2204), and the process returns to the main processing. On the other hand, if it is determined as a result of the processing of S2203 that no other command has been received (S2203: No), the command is not received from the display control device 114, and the process returns to the main processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27, the sound editing process (S1907) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. 26 and 27 are flowcharts showing the sound editing process (S1907). In the sound editing process, as described above, in the sound editing process, the audio data is decoded according to the display type command from the display control device 113 so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the audio output device 226 A process is performed to control the sound output LSI 301 so as to output the sound decoded therefrom.

  In the sound editing process, first, the display type flag 223b is referred to, and the display type indicated by the display type flag 223b (that is, the display type indicated by the display type command received from the display control device 114) newly reproduces BGM. It is determined whether or not a new BGM should be reproduced with respect to the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (S2300). For example, when the display type flag 223b is "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach", "opening effect for (big hit effect)", "round effect", "ending effect", etc., it is determined that new BGM is to be reproduced. .

  If it is not determined that the display type indicated by the display type flag 223b is to reproduce a new BGM as a result of the process of S2300 (S2300: Yes), the process proceeds to S2303. When the display type flag 223b is "OFF", that is, even when the display type command is not received from the display control device 114, the display type indicated by the display type flag 223b reproduces a new BGM. It is determined that there is, and the process proceeds to the process of S2303. On the other hand, if it is determined that the display type indicated by the display type flag 223b is to reproduce a new BGM (S2300: Yes), then the BGM to be reproduced in the display type indicated by the display type flag 223b is It is determined whether it has already been reproduced (S2301).

  As a result, if the BGM to be reproduced is already reproduced in the display type indicated by the display type flag 223 b (S 2301: Yes), the process proceeds to S 2303. On the other hand, if the BGM to be reproduced is not already reproduced in the display type indicated by the display type flag 223b (S2302: No), the reproduction of the BGM currently being reproduced is stopped to start the reproduction of the BGM to be reproduced. The sound output LSI 301 is set (S2302), and the process proceeds to S2303. By the process of S2302, the reproduction of the BGM currently being reproduced is stopped by the sound output LSI 301.

  In the process of S2303, it is determined whether or not the display type (display type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81) indicated by the display type flag 223b is to play normal BGM (S2303). For example, when the display type flag 223b is "high speed fluctuation", that is, when the fluctuation effect is started by the third symbol display device 81, the display type indicated by the display type flag 223b reproduces normal BGM. I judge that there is.

  If it is determined that the display type indicated by the display type flag 223b is to play normal BGM as a result of the process of S2303 (S2303: Yes), the process proceeds to S2312. The processes after S2312 will be described later with reference to FIG. When it is determined that the display type indicated by the display type flag 223b is not for reproducing normal BGM as a result of the process of S2303 (S2303: No), the process proceeds to S2304. When the display type flag 223b is "off", that is, even when the display type command is not received from the display control device 114, the display type indicated by the display type flag 223b is not for reproducing normal BGM. It is determined that the process proceeds to step S2304.

  In the process of S2304, it is determined whether or not the normal BGM is being reproduced (S2304). If the normal BGM is being reproduced (S2304: Yes), the process proceeds to S2314. The processes after S2314 will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is not during reproduction of normal BGM as a result of the processing of S2304 (S2304: No), it is then judged whether the display type indicated by the display type flag 223b is "normal reach" (S2305).

  As a result, if the display type indicated by the display type flag 223b is "normal reach" (S2305: Yes), the sound output LSI 301 is set to start reproduction of the basic part, upper instrument part and song part of the reach BGM. (S2306) Further, the mute of the musical instrument part and the song part is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2307), and the process proceeds to S2320.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S2305, if the display type indicated by the display type flag 223b is not "normal reach" (S2305: No), then the display type indicated by the display type flag 223b is "super reach" It is determined whether or not (S2308). As a result, when the display type indicated by the display type flag 223b is "super reach" (S2308: Yes), the mute release of the upper instrument part set to mute in the process of S2307 is set in the sound output LSI 301. (S2309), and the process proceeds to S2320.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S2308, if the display type indicated by the display type flag 223b is not "super reach" (S2308: No), then the display type indicated by the display type flag 223b is "special reach" It is determined whether or not (S2310). As a result, if the display type indicated by the display type flag 223 b is “special reach” (S 2310: Yes), the mute of the upper instrument part set to mute in the process of S 2307 is not canceled ( In other words, when the normal reach is developed to the special reach without passing through the super reach), the mute release of the upper instrument part is set in the sound output LSI 301, and the mute release of the song part set mute in the process of S2307. Are set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2311), and the process proceeds to the processing of S2320. On the other hand, if the display type indicated by the display type flag 223b is “special reach” (S2310: No) as a result of the process of S2310, the process proceeds to S2320.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 28, the output timing of the reach BGM when reach effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by executing the processing of S2305 to S2311 will be described. FIG. 28 is a timing chart showing the output timing of the reach BGM when the special reach is executed through the normal reach and the super reach by the third symbol display device 81.

  While the fluctuation effect is started by the third symbol display device 81 and the high speed fluctuation is performed, the sound output LSI 301 reproduces and outputs normal BGM. The normal BGM is output from the symbol stop of the left symbol row Z1 to the symbol stop of the right symbol row Z3. Then, when the same third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 (see FIG. 4) in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3, reach is established. At this time, a display type command indicating the display type “normal reach” is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 receives the display type command and performs display command determination processing ( According to FIG. 25), the display type flag 223b is set to "normal reach".

  Then, in the sound editing process (FIG. 26), the process of S2306 is executed, and the reproduction start of the basic part, the musical instrument part, and the song part of the reach BGM is set in the sound output LSI 301. As a result, the sound output LSI 301 reads out three data of the basic part data 306a1, the upper instrument part data 306a2, and the song part data 306a3 of the reach BGM data 306a from the audio data ROM 306, and uses three channels as shown in FIG. As shown in, start playing the three parts of the basic part of the reach BGM, the upper instrument part, and the song part.

  On the other hand, in the sound editing process (FIG. 26), the process of S2307 is also executed, and mute of the musical instrument part and the song part is set in the sound output LSI 301. As a result, in the sound output LSI 301, the mute of the upper musical instrument part and the song part is turned on, so these parts are not output from the audio output device 226, and only the basic part is output from the audio output device 226 for reach BGM. It will be done.

  Next, when super reach is established in the third symbol display device 81, a display type command indicating the display type "super reach" is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 Receives the display type command, and sets the display type flag 223b to "super reach" by the display command determination process (FIG. 25). Then, in the sound editing process (FIG. 26), the process of S2309 is executed, and the mute release of the musical instrument part is set in the sound output LSI 301. As a result, in the sound output LSI 301, the mute of the musical instrument part that has been turned on is turned off. Therefore, from the voice output device 226, at the timing when the third symbol display device 81 develops from the normal reach to the super reach, the musical instrument part is output over the reach BGM which has been output only to the basic part.

  Furthermore, when special reach is established in the third symbol display device 81, a display type command indicating the display type "special reach" is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 In response to the display type command, the display type flag 223b is set to "special reach" by the display command determination process (FIG. 25). Then, in the sound editing process (FIG. 26), the process of S2311 is executed, and mute cancellation of the song part is set in the sound output LSI 301. As a result, in the sound output LSI 301, the mute of the song part that has been turned on is turned off. Therefore, from the voice output device 226, at the timing when the third symbol display device 81 develops from super reach to special reach, the song part is covered by the reach BGM to which the song part and the top musical instrument part have been output until then. It is output.

  Thereafter, when the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the reproduction of the three parts of the basic part, the upper instrument part and the song part is stopped, and the reproduction of the reach BGM is ended.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the BGM for reach output from the audio output device 226 every time the normal reach changes to the super reach and the super reach changes to the special reach from the basic part only to the basic part + superior item The instrument part, the basic part + the upper instrument part + the song part and so on gradually become more and more flashy. Thereby, when the reach of the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 develops, the player is not only from the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 but also the voice output device The reach BGM output from 226 can improve the expectation of becoming a jackpot.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the BGM is flashed every time it develops from normal reach to super reach and from super reach to special reach, audio data for normal reach to be reproduced at normal reach and reproduction at super reach are performed. The voice data for super reach and the voice data for special reach to play at the time of special reach were prepared separately. Then, when reach (normal reach) is established, playback and output is performed using voice data for normal reach, and when it is developed into super reach, switching from voice data for normal reach (stop playback) and voice for super reach The data is used to play back and output, and when it has developed into a special reach, it switches from the audio data for super reach (stops playback) and plays back using a board with the voice for special reach. However, with this configuration, playback and output of voice data for super reach and voice data for special reach are started when developing to super reach or special reach, so the BGM cues at each timing. Because it is done, the continuity of BGM is interrupted, and it has become a result of putting water on the improvement of the sense of expectation that becomes a big hit.

  On the other hand, when the reach is established, the sound output LSI 301 starts reproduction of all the parts of the basic part, the upper musical instrument part, and the song part constituting the reach BGM, while the normal musical instrument during the normal reach The part and song part are muted, the mute part is unmuted when developing from normal reach to super reach, and the mute part is unmuted when developed from super reach to special reach. That is, when developing from the normal reach to the super reach, the basic instrument part which has been reproduced and output until that time is continuously reproduced and output as it is, while the superior instrument part is reproduced and output so as to cover the basic part. In addition, when developing from super reach to special reach, the basic part and the upper instrument part that have been reproduced and output until then are continuously reproduced and output as they are, while covering the basic part and the upper instrument part The song part is played back and output. Thereby, when developing into super reach or special reach, the BGM for reach can be flashed without interruption. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation also from the aspect of music according to the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without using water to improve the expectation of becoming a big hit by BGM as in the conventional pachinko machine Can be enhanced. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved by using the music.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the aspect which develops at a stretch from a normal reach to a special reach in the change production performed by the 3rd symbol display device 81 is also included. As described above, when developing from normal reach to special reach, in the process of S2311 of the sound editing process (FIG. 26), mute cancellation of the musical instrument part and the song part is set in the sound output LSI 301. As a result, the sound output LSI 301 unmutes the upper instrument part and the song part, mixes not only the basic part but also the sounds generated for the upper instrument part and the song part, and outputs the mixed sound from the audio output device 226 Do. Therefore, at the timing when the reach BGM, which has been output from the voice output device 206 only for the basic part so far, has progressed from the normal reach to the special reach, the basic instrument part and the song part are covered with the basic instrument part and the reach BGM is covered. It is output from the audio output device 206. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, the BGM for reach output from the audio output device 226, when developing from normal reach to special reach at a stretch, is from the basic part only, the basic part + the musical instrument part + the song part, Suddenly you become a flasher. As a result, the player can improve the expectation of becoming a big hit at a stretch not only from the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but also by the reach BGM output from the voice output device 226.

  Also in this case, when developing from the normal reach to the special reach, the basic part that has been reproduced and outputted until that time is continuously reproduced and outputted as it is, and the upper musical instrument part and the song part are covered over the basic part Is played back and output. Thereby, when developing from a normal reach to a special reach at a stretch, the continuity of the BGM for reach can be flashed without interruption. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation also from the aspect of music according to the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without using water to improve the expectation of becoming a big hit by BGM as in the conventional pachinko machine Can be enhanced. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved by using the music.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the process after S2312 of the sound editing process (S1907) will be described. As described above, the process of S2312 is executed when it is determined in the process of S2303 (see FIG. 26) that the display type indicated by the display type flag 223b is to reproduce normal BGM. In the process of S2312, it is determined whether the normal BGM has already been reproduced (S2312). As a result, if the normal BGM has already been reproduced (S2312: Yes), the process proceeds to S2315.

  On the other hand, if the normal BGM is not reproduced (S2312: No), the pattern to be reproduced in the first measure (the first measure) in order to start the reproduction of the normal BGM itself is determined by the following method from the first pattern The sound output LSI 301 is set to start the reproduction of the first measure in the determined pattern, which is determined from among the 10 patterns (S2313). That is, when the reproduction of the normal BGM itself is started and the pattern to be used in the first measure to be reproduced first is determined, the first pattern normal BGM pattern table 222b0 (see FIG. 9) is selected, and the first pattern is selected. From the numbers (1 to 10) associated with the current value of the normal BGM pattern counter 223d in the normal BGM pattern table 222b0, the pattern corresponding to the number is determined as the pattern to be reproduced in the first measure (the first measure) Do. The sound output LSI 301 starts reproduction of the first measure of normal BGM according to the set pattern, and outputs it from the sound output device 226.

  As described above, in the process of S2313, when a pattern is to be reproduced in the first measure (the first measure), the normal BGM pattern table corresponding to an arbitrary pattern may be fixedly selected, or the first pattern may be selected. The normal BGM pattern table corresponding to any of the 10th to 10th patterns may be selected from time to time. If the normal BGM pattern table to be used from time to time is selected, the bias of the selected pattern is suppressed, so that the normal BGM of various patterns can be heard by the player from the start of normal BGM reproduction. In addition, in the process of S2313, when a pattern is to be reproduced in the first measure (the first measure), any pattern among the first to tenth patterns is fixedly determined without using the normal BGM pattern table. It may be selected from the first pattern to the tenth pattern and determined from time to time.

  After the process of S2313, the reproduction time counter 223c is initialized to 0 (S2314), and the process proceeds to S2315. In the process of S2314, the playback time counter 223c is initialized to 0, and thereafter it is incremented by 1 at 1-msec intervals to determine whether playback of normal BGM has advanced by one measure or not. It can be determined using

  In the process of S2315, it is determined whether or not the reproduction of the normal BGM has advanced by one measure based on the value of the reproduction time counter 223c (S2315). If it is not determined that the normal BGM playback has advanced by one bar (S2315: No), the process proceeds to S2320 (FIG. 26). On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal BGM playback has advanced by one bar (S2315: Yes), then the current BGM pattern table used to determine the pattern to be used in the next measure is currently played back. The normal BGM pattern table (see FIG. 9) corresponding to the pattern of a bar (one of the first to tenth patterns) is selected from among the first pattern normal BGM pattern table 202b0 to the tenth pattern normal BGM pattern table 202b9 It selects and sets (S2316).

  Next, in the set normal pattern table, from the numbers (1 to 10) associated with the current value of the normal BGM pattern counter 223d, the pattern corresponding to the number is determined as the pattern to be reproduced in the next measure ((1) S2317). Then, information on the pattern for which the reproduction start of the next measure is determined is included in the sound output LSI 301 (S2318). As a result, the sound output LSI 301 starts to play the bar next to the normal BGM according to the set pattern, and outputs it from the sound output device 226.

  Thereafter, the reproduction time counter 223c is initialized to 0 (S2319), and the process shifts to the processing of S2320 (FIG. 26). Thereby, it is possible to determine again whether or not the reproduction of the normal BGM has advanced by one measure using the reproduction time counter 223c.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when normal BGM of four measures is loop-reproduced, sound data of ten patterns (first to tenth patterns) different in rhythm, melody, backing (accompaniment), etc. for each measure are used. Have. Then, by the processing of S2312 to S2319, for each output start timing of the bar to be reproduced, a pattern to be used for reproduction of the bar is determined in advance from 10 patterns, and information for specifying the determined pattern is included. The bar output start setting is set to the sound output LSI 301 for each bar.

  When the reproduction start of the novel is set, the sound output LSI 301 determines which reproduction start of which measure of which measure, and reads out the corresponding audio data from the normal BGM data 306 b. Then, the sound output LSI 301 generates a normal BGM according to the read voice data, mixes it with another generated sound, and outputs the generated normal BGM from the sound output device 226.

  Thus, when normal BGM is played back, the pattern to be played back in each bar is determined from among 10 patterns each time each bar is played back, so the pattern played back in one loop (4 bars) is 10 × 10 × 10 × 10 = 10000 patterns are obtained. This allows the player to hear a different pattern every time one loop of normal BGM is played back, thereby eliminating the feeling that the normal BGM is looped and not getting bored even if it is listened to for a long time, The player can always feel the newness.

  Returning to FIG. 26, the processes after S2320 in the sound editing process (S1907) will be described. In the process of S2320, other processes corresponding to the display type indicated by the display type flag 223b are executed (S2320). For example, when the display type indicated by the display type flag 223 b is “opening effect”, the sound output LSI 301 is set to start reproduction of BGM used in the opening effect of the big hit. Further, when the display type indicated by the display type flag 223b is "normal reach", the sound output LSI 301 is set to output a voice of "reach!" Separately from the reach BGM, in addition to the processing of S2306 and S2307. .

  Thereafter, the display type flag 223b is set to "OFF" (S2321), and the processing returns to the main processing.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processes of the MPU 231 are roughly classified into a main process that is repeatedly executed after power on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and the V interrupt signal detected by the MPU 231. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when it occurs. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted by the image controller 237 to the MPU 231. The image controller 237 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for completing the image drawing process for one frame. Do.

  The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 29, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  In this main process, an initial setting process is executed (S2401). Specifically, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  After the processing of S2401, interrupt permission is set (S2402), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2402, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30A, the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 30 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2501), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process (S2602) of the V interrupt process described later, and a process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32 (b), the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 32 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list (see FIG. 15) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In the V interrupt process, first, a command determination process (S2602) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2603) is executed. In the command determination process (S2602), the content of the command stored in the command buffer area is analyzed, and a process according to the command is executed. For example, when the display variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is read out from the display data table storage area 232a. Are set in the display data table buffer 233a.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are stored in the command buffer area in 20 milliseconds. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect such as the variation effect selected by the main controller 110 or the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image corresponding to the aspect is The drawing of the image can be controlled to be displayed on the symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33.

  In the display setting process (S2603), the address indicated by the pointer 233c is defined based on the contents of the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b by the command determination process (S2602) or the like. In accordance with the drawn contents, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 are specified concretely.

  In addition, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233, display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the address indicated by the pointer 233c ( 12), the display type command for notifying the display content to the audio lamp control device 113 is generated, and processing for transmitting the generated display command to the audio lamp control device 113 is performed.

  Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in accordance with the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233a. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 34 to 37.

  After the display setting process (S2603) is executed, task processing is then executed (S2604). In this task processing, based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting processing (S2603), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is selected. In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S2605). In this drawing process, the drawing list shown in FIG. 13 is generated from the types of various sprites constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task processing (S2604), and the drawing list is displayed. It transmits to the image controller 237. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2606). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by processing of S2606, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (other than 15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, front and back outreach, front and back out The stop type table corresponding to reach, complete removal) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2602) which is one process of the V interrupt process will be described. First, FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this command determination process. The command interruption process is executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114.

  In this command determination process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S 2701), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S 2701: No), the command determination process is ended. Return to V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2701: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2603) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2702). For all unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S2703).

  Then, it is determined whether or not there is a command for the number of holding balls for display among the unprocessed commands (S2704), and if there is a command for the number of holding balls for display (S2704: Yes), the processing for the number of holding balls command processing Are executed (S2705), and the process returns to the process of S2701.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 32A, details of the holding ball number command processing (S2705) will be described. FIG. 32 (a) is a flow chart showing the pending ball number command processing. This holding ball number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display holding ball number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the holding ball count command processing, first, a new holding ball count command flag is turned on (S2801). The new holding ball count command flag is a flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2603) that the display holding ball count command has been processed in the on state. Next, the information on the number of holding balls included in the command for number of holding balls for display is acquired (S2802).

  In the process of S2802, if two or more display holding balls commands are stored in the command buffer area, the holding ball information is acquired from the display holding balls commands stored last. Thereby, the latest holding ball number information can be acquired.

  Then, among the number determination flags provided for each number of holding balls, the number determination flag corresponding to the number of holding balls acquired in the process of S2802 is turned on, and the number determination flag corresponding to the other number of holding balls is turned off. Then, the process returns to the command determination process (S2803).

  In the display setting process, when the new holding ball number command flag is on, by referring to the number determination flag, the holding ball number pattern for the number of holding balls corresponding to the number determination flag set to ON is the small area The hold image data is expanded so as to be displayed on Ds1.

  Referring back to FIG. 31, if it is determined in the process of S2704 that there is no display reserved ball number command (S2704: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display confirmation command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display confirmation command (S2706: Yes), the confirmation command processing is executed (S2707), and the process returns to S2701.

  Here, the details of the confirmation command processing (S2707) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 (b) is a flowchart showing the confirmation command process. This confirmation command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display confirmation command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the confirmation command process (S2707), the confirmation command flag is set to ON (S2811), and this process is ended. The confirmation command flag is a flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2603) that the display confirmation command has been received in the ON state. In the display setting process, the state of the confirmation command flag is monitored, and when the flag is turned on, the display setting process is executed so that the display of the confirmation display effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. . In addition, after processing the setting of the display of the fluctuation effect, if the confirmation command flag does not turn on even after the effect time set in the fluctuation effect passes, the restart effect (swing the third symbol up and down The display setting process is executed so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect).

  Referring back to FIG. 31, when it is determined in the process of S2706 that there is no display confirmation command (S2706: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands. (S2708) If there is a display variation pattern command (S2708: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S2709), and the process returns to S2701.

  Here, the details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (S2709) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. The variation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, the detailed variation pattern determined by the voice lamp control device 113 indicated by the display variation pattern command is extracted (S 2831). Next, the extracted details are read out from the display data table storage area 232a from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2832).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2832, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, variation display data corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is shortest. The table is set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Temporarily, if the display data table for fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having the fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is main control When instructed by the device 110, while the variation design according to the set display data table for variation is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the confirmation command from the main control device 110 (display determination command ) And the third symbol in fluctuation is suddenly stopped and displayed, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, by setting the display data table for variation corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233 d as in the present embodiment, the display data table is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having the fluctuation time is instructed by main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to display data table buffer 233d is ended, the confirmation command from main controller 110 Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed until the (display confirmation command) is received, the player visually recognizes the restart effect as a part of the fluctuation effect. The variation of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 can be continued without discomfort until the stop display of the third symbol is determined.

  Next, null data is written in the additional data table buffer 233b to clear the contents (S2833). Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the processing of S2832, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233e (S2834). Then, the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2835), and the confirmation command flag, the demonstration display flag, and the confirmation display flag are all set to OFF (S2836). Furthermore, the restart timer counter used in the display setting process is initialized to 0 (S2837), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing the variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233c initialized by the process of S2835, the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the process of S2832 Then, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233c is extracted, and the third symbol display device 81 specifies the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect defined in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233e in which fluctuation time data is set by the process of S2834, and the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table If it is determined that the command has been completed, a confirmation command effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 if a confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 is received. In addition, if the confirmation command (display confirmation command) can not be received within a predetermined time after the end of the fluctuation effect, the display setting is controlled to display the restart effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, by setting the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag to OFF in the process of S2836, it is possible to display the fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81 instead of the demonstration effect and the confirmation display effect being displayed. . Further, when the determination command and the display variation pattern command are both stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination process, the above-described determination command process (S2707) is executed first and the determination command flag Is set to ON, then, this variation pattern command processing (S2711) is executed, and the confirmation command flag is turned off by the processing of S2836.

  Here, if both the display confirmation command and the display fluctuation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, priority is given to the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command. Since the fluctuation effect accompanying the fluctuation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to give priority to the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command. On the other hand, in the present command determination process, since the determination of the presence or absence of the display confirmation command is performed first, the confirmation command process, which is the process corresponding to the display confirmation command, is always executed first. The process corresponding to the for-use variation pattern command is executed later, and as in the process of S2836, the finalized command flag set by the finalized command for display can be set to “off” by overwriting. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display confirmation command, and the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed with priority given to the variation effect associated with the display variation pattern command.

  Referring back to FIG. 31, if it is determined in the process of S2708 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2708: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display suspension type command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display type command for suspension (S2710: Yes), the type of command processing for type is executed (S2711), and the process returns to S2701.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2711) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command process. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display stop type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In stop type command processing, first, stop type information (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, reach out completely, completely out, special stop design) indicated by the display stop type command (S2841), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter which is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 30 (b)) is executed. The final stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set (S2842).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2842 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is It sets to OFF (S2843), and returns to command determination processing.

  Here, as described above, in the display data table for variation, the processing of S2842 as type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the drawing content corresponding to the address after the predetermined time The offset information (pattern offset information) from the stop symbol set by is described. In the above-mentioned task processing (S2604), after the above-mentioned predetermined time has passed since the fluctuation was started, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2842 is specified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by S2843, and the specification The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol. Then, the address of the character storage area 234a in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified.

  Since determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, command determination processing is executed. In the case where two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, there is no possibility, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously displayed for display It may also be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2841, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set by the processing of S2842. In such a case, the stop type table may be determined on the assumption that the stop type is a special stop symbol even in the case of the complete removal.

  Here, if the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is set, the stop symbol of the jackpot will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the stop symbol is actually out. The player may misunderstand that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has become a big hit, and the reliability of the pachinko machine 10 may be reduced. On the other hand, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete removal is set as in the present embodiment, and in the case of a large hit, the complete removal stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in practice. Also, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the jackpot state, it is possible to please the player.

  Returning to FIG. 31, if it is determined that there is no display type command for suspension in the process of S2710 (S2710: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2712), and the process of S2701 Return to

  In the process of S2701 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2701: Yes ), The processing of S2702 to S2712 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2701 to S2712 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in the process of S2701 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2701: No ), This command determination processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 47, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2603) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIGS. 34 and 35 are flowcharts showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 34, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S2901), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S2901: No), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, and the process of S2902 to S2904 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2905. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S2901: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process to be executed earlier, and the new command flag is set to off (S2902). Processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of S2904.

  In the process of S2903, it is determined whether or not the new holding ball number command flag is on (S2903), and if the new holding ball number command flag is on (S2903: Yes), it is displayed in the previous command determination process It is determined that the holding ball number command has been processed, and the holding image setting process is executed (S2904).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 36, the details of the hold image setting process will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the hold image setting process. This holding image setting process causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the holding ball number design for the holding ball number notified from the voice lamp control device 113 in accordance with the processing of the display holding ball number command. To expand the image data.

  In the holding image setting process, first, the number determination flag is referred to, and the number of holding balls number pattern for the number of holding balls corresponding to the number determination flag set to ON is the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 4) The hold image data to be displayed on the page is expanded (S 2951). In task processing, based on the expanded reserved image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the reserved image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various required parameters.

  In the holding image setting process, after the process of S2951, the new holding ball number command is set to OFF (S2952), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Returning to FIG. 34, after the pending image setting process (S2904) or in the process of S2903, if it is determined that the new pending ball count command flag is not on, ie, off (S2903: No), then , S2905 processing.

  At S2905, pointer update processing is executed (S2905). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update processing, the pointer 233c for specifying the address for acquiring the corresponding drawing content is updated from the display data table and the additional data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. Processing.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233c (S2981). That is, in principle, the pointer 233c is updated such that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233a, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so that each address is sequentially from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233c is updated by the process of S2981, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233c is End information (S2982). As a result, if it is the End information (S2982: Yes), it means that the pointer 233c has been updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a past the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table (S2983), and the demonstration display data table or the restart display data If it is a table (S2983: Yes), the pointer 233c is set to 1 (S2984), and it corresponds to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a. The time data is set to the clock counter 233e (S2985), and the process proceeds to the process of S2987. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table, so the third symbol display device 81 repeats the demonstration effect or the restart effect. It can be displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2983 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is neither a demonstration display data table nor a restart display data table (S2983: No), the pointer 233c is selected. The value is decremented by 1 (S2986), and the process proceeds to S2987. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demonstration display data table and the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a, for example, the display data table for variation and the finalized display data table are set. , Because the drawing contents of the previous address at which the End information is described is always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed with the last image defined in the display data table being stopped. be able to.

  If it is determined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a that the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233c after the update by the process of S2981 is not the end information as a result of the process of S2982 (S2982: No ), Skip the processing of S2983 to S2986, and shift to the processing of S2987.

  In the process of S2987, it is determined whether or not the finalized command flag is on (S2987), and if the finalized command flag is not on but off (S2987: No), the pointer updating process is terminated and display setting is performed. Return to processing. On the other hand, if the determination command flag is on (S2987: Yes), this means that the determination command (display determination command) has been received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, so the display data table buffer The value of the pointer 233c is set to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the end position address at which the end information is stored in the display data buffer set in 233a (S2988), and the value of the clock counter is set to 1 Then, the process returns to the display setting process (S2989). Thereby, when the confirmation command is received, in the display setting process, the drawing contents defined at the end of the set display data table can be expanded, and the start of the definite display effect can be controlled.

  Referring back to FIG. 34, after the pointer update process (S2905), the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b are indicated by the pointer 233c updated by the pointer update process. The drawing contents of the address to be read are expanded (S2906). In task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S2906 together with the reserved image expanded earlier, and the display coordinate position for each sprite Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as zoom ratio and rotation angle. If null data is described in the additional data table, the subsequent processing is executed assuming that there is no sprite to be added. Whenever the additional data table buffer 233b is cleared with null data, null data is expanded from the additional data table buffer 233b.

  In the process of S2906, also, in the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b, the display to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the address indicated by the pointer 233c If the content (see FIG. 12) is defined, a display type command for notifying the display content (display type) to the audio lamp control device 113 is generated, and the generated display command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. . As a result, the display content (display type) of the third symbol display device 81 is notified to the sound lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 performs control to output, from the audio output device 226, a voice that is in the display content (display type) notified by the display type command.

  In the process of S2906, in the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b, some information for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to the address indicated by the pointer 233c. Is described, a command including the information is generated and transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. For example, in the case where the sound lamp control device 113 controls the operation of an accessory provided on the game board, if the operation content of the accessory is described in the display data table or the additional data table, A command including operation content is generated and transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 is indicated by a command by defining the operation content of the special feature in the display data table and the additional data table so as to match the content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By controlling the action of the prize according to the contents of the action of the prize, the prize can be operated according to the contents of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233e is decremented by 1 (S2907), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233e after subtraction is 0 or less (S2908). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233e is 1 or more (S2908: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233e is 0 or less (S2908: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a has elapsed. At this time, when the display data table for variation is set in the display data table buffer 233a, the confirmation command (display determination command from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 is made according to the end of the effect. Is to be transmitted, it is checked in the subsequent processing of S2909 whether or not the confirmation command flag is on (S2909).

  As a result, if the determination command flag is on (S2909: Yes), this means that the determination command (display determination command) has been received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, so first stop While deciding the mode of the definite display effect according to the stop design which is shown by the design distinction flag, setting the definite display data table of that aspect in the display data table buffer 233a, writing null data in the additional data table buffer 233b, The content is cleared (S2910). Next, time data corresponding to the presentation time of the finalized display is set in the clock counter 233e (S2911), and the value of the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2912). Then, the set command flag is set to off (S2913), and then the set display flag indicating that the set display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S2914), and the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are used as they are in the work RAM 233 Copy to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in (S2915), and return to the V interrupt processing.

  As a result, when the display data table for variation is set in the display data table buffer 233a, etc., the final command from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 is determined according to the end of the effect. When the command is received, the drawing content can be set such that the final display effect of the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S2915 is used in order to specify the 3rd symbol which should be displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 in the fluctuation production performed next. That is, as described above, since the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect starts from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is started The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is defined until a predetermined time passes since it is done. In task processing (S2604), the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S2915 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the change. Then, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information defined in the display data table for variation described above to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if the confirmed command flag is not on but off in the process of S2909 (S2909: No), the process proceeds to S2916 shown in FIG. 35, and it is determined whether the confirmed display flag is on (S2916) ). Then, if the finalized display flag is on (S2916: Yes), the result of the determination in the process of S2908 (S2908: Yes) means that the finalized display effect has ended, so the finalized display flag is set to off. After that (S2917), the demonstration display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a (S2918), and then the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the data display is set in the clock counter 233e (S2919). Then, the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2920), a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration effect is being performed in the on state is set on (S2921), and the process returns to the V interrupt processing.

  As a result, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display demonstration effect command indicating the start of the demonstration effect is not received by the time the finalized display effect ends, automatically, The drawing contents can be set so that the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the branch condition of S2916: Yes is satisfied when the fixed display effect is performed, and in this case, the contents of the additional data table buffer 233b are cleared by the process of S2910. Therefore, in the process of S2918, the process of clearing those data table buffers is omitted. Thus, the processing load on the MPU 231 can be reduced.

  In the process of S2916, if the finalized display flag is not on but is off (S2916: No), it is then determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S2922). Then, if the demonstration display flag is on (S2922: Yes), the result of the judgment in the process of S2908 (S2908: Yes) means that the demonstration effect has ended, so the display setting process is ended as it is, and V Return to interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2922, if the demonstration display flag is not on but is off (S2922: No), the result of the determination in the process of S2908 (S2908: Yes) means that the fluctuation effect has ended. Therefore, if the confirmation command is not received even after a predetermined time has passed since the end of the fluctuation production, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation production is set in the display data table buffer 233a in order to start the restart effect. At the same time, 1 is added to the restart timer counter initialized to 0 (S2923), and it is determined whether the value of the restart timer counter after addition has reached a predetermined value (S2924).

  Then, if the restart timer counter does not have the predetermined value (S2924: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interruption process. If the restart timer counter has a predetermined value (S2924: Yes), the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a, and Null data is written in the additional data table buffer 233b and the contents are displayed. Clear (S2925). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time of the restart effect is set in the clock counter 233e (S2926), and further, the value of the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S2927), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, in the display control device 114, the confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 even if a predetermined time has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed along with the end of the fluctuation effect. When (display confirmation command) is not received, the drawing content can be set so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the restart effect is an effect of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an image in which the third symbol is vibrated. When the player visually recognizes that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the third symbol display is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the stop symbol is not determined at that time. Can be recognized.

  Note that after the last drawing content defined by the restart display data table is expanded, the drawing content is expanded again from the top of the restart display data table by the above-described pointer update processing. Therefore, the restart effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until the display confirmation command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 or the new display variation pattern command is received. The restart effect is to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display the third symbol in a mode of vibrating (swinging) the third symbol around the predetermined position, and in the restart display data table, the third symbol is displayed at least once. It defines only the drawing contents necessary to make it swing and display. Then, by repeatedly developing the drawing content from the top of the restart display data table, a restart effect in which the third symbol is repeatedly vibrated is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this way, by making the restart effect the effect of causing the third symbol display device 81 to vibrate and display the third symbol, the restart display data table causes the third symbol to rock at least once. Since it is sufficient to store only the drawing contents necessary for displaying, the capacity required for storing the restart display data table can be reduced.

  If the display confirmation command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S2910 shown in FIG. 34 is performed, and the display data table buffer is displayed. A finalized display data table is set in 233a. As a result, even when the restart effect is being performed, the stop display of the third symbol is performed with the stop symbol indicated by the stop symbol determination flag in accordance with the reception of the display confirmation command, and the confirmation display effect is performed by the third symbol display device 81 Can be displayed.

  Further, when the display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S2832 of FIG. In the data table buffer 233a, a variation display data table is set, and a variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the restart effect, the confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 to be originally received is not received even if a predetermined time has passed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed with the end of the fluctuation effect. Since the effect is displayed in the case, there is a possibility that the confirmation command may not be received while the restart effect is displayed due to the influence of noise, a malfunction or the like. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if the display variation pattern command is received during the restart effect, the effect corresponding to the command can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so the third symbol display device Various effects in 81 can be performed in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2605) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2604) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) The drawing list shown in FIG. 13 is generated from the color information and the filter specification information (S3001). That is, in the process of S3001, based on the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2604), the address of the character storage area 234a storing the image data of the sprite is specified for each sprite. Then, the parameter necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing is associated with the specified address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the address of the character storage area 234a in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information).

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing object buffer information specified by the drawing object buffer flag (not shown) are transmitted to the image controller (S3002). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag is 0, information instructing to expand the drawn image is included in the first frame buffer provided in the video RAM 236 as drawing target buffer information. Further, when the drawing target buffer flag is 1, the second frame buffer provided in the video RAM as the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to expand the drawn image.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the image developed earlier from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing processing and the display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3002, the drawing object buffer flag is updated (S3003). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag is updated by inverting the value, that is, setting it to “1” when the value is “0” or “0” if it is “1”. It will be. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer and the second frame buffer of the video RAM 236 each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 30B) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the processing and display processing is executed, 20 milliseconds after the image rendering processing for one frame is completed, the second frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the image for one frame is specified. The first frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer from which information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. . Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer. Thereafter, the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read are alternately designated for each of the first frame buffer and the second frame buffer every 20 milliseconds. This makes it possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, the reach BGM output at the time of reach is covered with the basic part including the rhythm and the basic melody line and the basic part. It comprises a musical instrument part in which a decorative performance is performed by a musical instrument, and a song part in which a song by a human voice is put on the basic part and the musical instrument part. When reach (normal reach) is established in the fluctuation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 sends a sound part LSI 301 to the sound output LSI 301 a basic part as a BGM for reach and a musical instrument. While instructing reproduction of all parts of the part and the song part, mute is set for the musical instrument part and the song part. Then, when the normal reach is changed to the super reach in the fluctuation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 221 sets the sound output LSI 301 to mute release of the upper musical instrument part. Furthermore, in the fluctuation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, when the development reaches from the super reach to the special reach, the MPU 221 sets the mute of the song part to the sound output LSI 301.

  As a result, in the pachinko machine 10, the BGM for reach output from the audio output device 226 every time it progresses from normal reach to super reach and from super reach to special reach from only the basic part to the basic part + the musical instrument. The part, the basic part + the upper instrument part + the song part gradually become more and more flashy. Therefore, when the reach of the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 develops, the player is not limited to the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but also the voice output device 226. With the reach BGM output from, it is possible to improve the expectation of becoming a big hit.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the BGM is flashed every time it develops from normal reach to super reach and from super reach to special reach, audio data for normal reach to be reproduced at normal reach and reproduction at super reach are performed. The voice data for super reach and the voice data for special reach to play at the time of special reach were prepared separately. Then, when reach (normal reach) is established, playback and output is performed using voice data for normal reach, and when it is developed into super reach, switching from voice data for normal reach (stop playback) and voice for super reach The data is used to play back and output, and when it has developed into a special reach, it switches from the audio data for super reach (stops playback) and plays back using a board with the voice for special reach. However, with this configuration, playback and output of voice data for super reach and voice data for special reach are started when developing to super reach or special reach, so the BGM cues at each timing. Because it is done, the continuity of BGM is interrupted, and it has become a result of putting water on the improvement of the sense of expectation that becomes a big hit.

  On the other hand, when the reach is established, the sound output LSI 301 starts reproduction of all the parts of the basic part, the upper musical instrument part, and the song part constituting the reach BGM, while the normal musical instrument during the normal reach The part and song part are muted, the mute part is unmuted when developing from normal reach to super reach, and the mute part is unmuted when developed from super reach to special reach. That is, when developing from the normal reach to the super reach, the basic instrument part which has been reproduced and output until that time is continuously reproduced and output as it is, while the superior instrument part is reproduced and output so as to cover the basic part. In addition, when developing from super reach to special reach, the basic part and the upper instrument part that have been reproduced and output until then are continuously reproduced and output as they are, while covering the basic part and the upper instrument part The song part is played back and output. Thereby, when developing into super reach or special reach, the BGM for reach can be flashed without interruption. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation also from the aspect of music according to the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without using water to improve the expectation of becoming a big hit by BGM as in the conventional pachinko machine Can be enhanced. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved by using the music.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10, the normal BGM reproduced at normal time is composed of four measures (the first measure to the fourth measure), and the normal BGM of the four measures is reproduced in loop from the audio output device 226. When outputting normal BGM from the audio output device 226, the MPU 221 sets the sound output LSI 301 to start reproduction of the measure at each output start timing of the measure to be reproduced. Here, each measure has audio data of 10 patterns different in rhythm, melody, backing (accompaniment), etc. When normal BGM is output from the audio output device 226, output of the measure to be reproduced is started At each timing, a pattern to be used for reproducing the bar is determined in advance from among the ten patterns, and information for specifying the determined pattern is included in the setting for starting the reproduction of the bar to the sound output LSI 301. As a result, when normal BGM is played back, the pattern to be played back in each bar is determined from among 10 patterns each time each bar is played back, so the pattern played back in one loop (4 bars) is 10 The pattern is × 10 × 10 × 10 = 10000 patterns. Therefore, every time the normal BGM for one loop is reproduced, the player can be made to hear a different pattern, so there is no feeling that the BGM is looped normally and there is no boredom even if you listen for a long time, always The player can be made to feel the newness.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 39 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of audio data stored in the audio data ROM 306 provided in the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment, as the reach BGM data 306a stored in the audio data ROM 306, basic part data 306a1 for a basic part composed of a rhythm and a basic melody line, and basic parts Top musical instrument part data 306a2 for the top musical instrument part where decorative performance by the top musical instrument is performed, and a song for the song part containing a song by human voice over the basic part and the top musical instrument part While preparing part data 306a3 and starting the reproduction of all parts when reach is established, the upper instrument part and the song part are muted during normal reach, and when the normal reach is developed to the super reach A song when you unmutate a musical instrument part and develop from super reach to special reach It was described for the case to release the mute of the vessel part.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, the reach BGM data 306a is a decorative performance together with the first data 306a4 for reproducing only the basic part and the basic part. And second data 306a5 for reproducing the second part composed of the third part data 306a6 for reproducing the third part composed of a more decorative performance than the second part together with the basic part. And contains. The third part reproduced by the third data 306a6 is, for example, a part whose number is larger than the number of parts other than the basic part (number of musical instruments and song parts) included in the second part in addition to the basic part By being configured, decorative performances are performed more flashy than the second part.

  The first data 306a4, the second data 306a5, and the third data 306a6 are all reproduced at the same tempo, and when these three data 306a4 to a6 simultaneously start reproduction, the basic parts included in the respective data 306a4 to a6 are simultaneously proceed. In addition, when these three data 306a4 to a6 are reproduced to the end, they are reproduced to the beginning again in loop reproduction. Here, the three data 306a4 to a6 end reproduction of one loop at the same timing, and return to the beginning at the same timing to start reproduction again. Therefore, in a state where the reproduction of these three data 306a4 to a6 is started simultaneously, only one certain data is unmuted and the remaining data is muted, and then the unmuted data is muted. When the mute of another data is released, the player can be made to listen as if the output part is changed while one melody continues.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the sound editing process (S1907) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing part of the sound editing process (S1907). The difference between the sound editing process of the second embodiment and the sound editing process of the first embodiment is that, first, as a result of the process of S2305, it is determined that the display type indicated by the display type flag 223b is "normal reach". When it is done (S2305: Yes), the processing of S2331 and S2332 is executed instead of the processing of S2306 and S2307.

  That is, in the process of S2305, when it is determined that the display type indicated by the display type flag 223b is "normal reach" (S2305: Yes), in the second embodiment, first, the first data 306a4 for reach BGM. The sound output LSI 301 is set to start reproduction of the three data of the second data 306a5 and the third data 306a6 (S2331). Further, mute of the second data 306a5 and the third data 306a6 is set to the sound output LSI 301 (S2332), and the process proceeds to the processing of S2320.

  The second difference between the sound editing process of the second embodiment and the sound editing process of the first embodiment is that the display type indicated by the display type flag 223b is "super reach" as a result of the process of S2308. If it is determined that there is (S2308: Yes), the processing of S2333 and S2334 is executed instead of the processing of S2309. That is, in the process of S2308, when it is determined that the display type indicated by the display type flag 223b is "super reach" (S2308: Yes), the second embodiment first mutes the first data 306a4. The sound output LSI 301 is set (S2333), and then the mute cancellation of the second data 306a5 is set in the sound output LSI 301 (S2334), and the process proceeds to S2320.

  The third difference between the sound editing process in the second embodiment and the sound editing process in the first embodiment is that the display type indicated by the display type flag 223b is "special reach" as a result of the process in S2310. If it is determined that there is (S2310: Yes), the processing of S2335 and S2336 is executed instead of the processing of S2311. That is, in the process of S2310, when it is determined that the display type indicated by the display type flag 223b is "special reach" (S2310: Yes), in the second embodiment, mute of the first data 306a5 is performed first. If the first data 306a5 is unmuted (i.e., if the second data 306a5 is unmuted) (i.e., if the second data 306a5 is unmuted) (i.e., if the second data 306a5 is unmuted) In the case of development to special reach after super reach), mute of the second data 306a5 is set to the sound output LSI 301 (S2335), and then mute release of the third data 306a6 is set to the sound output LSI 301 (S2336) , S2320 processing.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 41, the output timing of the reach BGM when reach effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by execution of each processing of S2305 to S2310 and S2331 to S2336. explain. FIG. 41 is a timing chart showing the output timing of the reach BGM when the special reach is executed through the normal reach and the super reach by the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment.

  As in the first embodiment, while the variable effect is started in the third symbol display device 81 and high-speed variation is performed, the normal BGM is reproduced and output from the sound output LSI 301 and passes through the symbol stop of the left symbol row Z1. The normal BGM is output until the symbol stop of the right symbol row Z3. Then, when the same third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 (see FIG. 4) in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3, when the reach is established, the display control device 114 to the voice lamp control device 113 , A display type command indicating the display type "normal reach" is transmitted. The audio lamp control device 113 receives the display type command and sets the display type flag 223b to "normal reach" by the display command determination process (FIG. 25).

  Then, in the sound editing process (FIG. 40), the process of S2331 is executed, and the reproduction start of the three data of the first data 306a4, the second data 306a5, and the third data 306a6 for reach BGM is set in the sound output LSI 301. Ru. Thereby, the sound output LSI 301 reads out three data of the first data 306a4, the second data 306a5, and the third data 306a6 of the reach BGM data 306a from the voice data ROM 306, and uses three channels as shown in FIG. As a matter of course, playback of all three data is started.

  On the other hand, in the sound editing process (FIG. 26), the process of S2332 is also executed, and mute of the second data 306a5 and the third data 306a6 is set in the sound output LSI 301. As a result, in the sound output LSI 301, the mute of the second data 306a5 and the third data 306a6 is turned on, so that the sound reproduced from these data is not output from the sound output device 226, and the reach BGM is the first data. Only the basic part reproduced by 306a1 is output from the audio output device 226.

  Next, when super reach is established in the third symbol display device 81, a display type command indicating the display type "super reach" is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 Receives the display type command, and sets the display type flag 223b to "super reach" by the display command determination process (FIG. 25). Then, in the sound editing process (FIG. 40), the processes of S2333 and S2334 are executed, the mute of the first data 306a4 is set to the sound output LSI 301, and the mute release of the second data 306a5 is set to the sound output LSI 301. Ru. Thereby, in the sound output LSI 301, the mute of the first data 306a4 is turned on and the mute of the second data 306a5 is turned off. Therefore, when the super reach is established, the reach BGM is basically reproduced by the second data 306a5. The two parts of the part and the second part constituted by the decorative performance are outputted from the audio output device 226.

  Furthermore, when special reach is established in the third symbol display device 81, a display type command indicating the display type "special reach" is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 In response to the display type command, the display type flag 223b is set to "special reach" by the display command determination process (FIG. 25). Then, in the sound editing process (FIG. 40), the processes of S2335 and S2336 are executed, the mute of the second data 306a5 is set to the sound output LSI 301, and the mute release of the third data 306a6 is set to the sound output LSI 301. Ru. Thereby, in the sound output LSI 301, the mute of the second data 306a5 is turned on and the mute of the third data 306a6 is turned off. Therefore, when the special reach is established, the reach BGM is basically reproduced by the third data 306a5. The audio output device 226 outputs two parts, a part and a third part, which is composed of a decorative performance of the second part rather than the second part.

  Thereafter, when the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the reproduction of the three data of the first data 306a4, the second data 306a5, and the third data 306a6 is stopped, and the reproduction of the reach BGM is performed. finish.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the first data 306a4, the second data 306a5, and the third data 306a6 used for reproduction of the reach BGM every time the normal reach changes to the super reach and the super reach changes to the special reach. Among the three data, the data for which mute is turned off is switched in the order of the first data 306 a 4 → the second data 306 a 5 → the third data 306 a 6, and the reach BGM output from the audio output device 226 is from the basic part only. The basic part + second part, the basic part + third part, and so on. Thereby, when the reach of the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 develops, the player is not only from the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 but also the voice output device The reach BGM output from 226 can improve the expectation of becoming a jackpot.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as described above in the first embodiment, when the BGM is flashed every time it is developed from the normal reach to the super reach and from the super reach to the special reach, it is for normal reach to be reproduced at normal reach. The voice data, the voice data for super reach to be played at super reach, and the voice data for special reach to be played at special reach are separately prepared. Then, when reach (normal reach) is established, playback and output is performed using voice data for normal reach, and when it is developed into super reach, switching from voice data for normal reach (stop playback) and voice for super reach The data is used to play back and output, and when it has developed into a special reach, it switches from the audio data for super reach (stops playback) and plays back using a board with the voice for special reach. However, with this configuration, playback and output of voice data for super reach and voice data for special reach are started when developing to super reach or special reach, so the BGM cues at each timing. Because it is done, the continuity of BGM is interrupted, and it has become a result of putting water on the improvement of the sense of expectation that becomes a big hit.

  On the other hand, when the reach is established, the sound output LSI 301 starts reproduction of all the three data of the first data 306a4, the second data 306a5, and the third data 306a6 that constitute the reach BGM, while the normal reach The second data 306a5 and the third data 306a6 are muted except for the first data 306a4 which reproduces only the basic part during the period, and the second data which reproduces the two parts of the basic part and the second part during the super reach The mute of 306a5 is released to mute the first data 306a4 and the third data 306a6, and during the special reach, the third data 306a5 for reproducing the three parts of the basic part and the third part is released and the first data 306a4 is released. And mute the second data 306a5.

  As described above, in the first data 306a4, the second data 306a5, and the third data 306a6, only one data is unmuted and the remaining data is muted, which is a state in which the reproduction of these three data 306a4 to a6 is started simultaneously. Then, after muting the unmuted data and unmuting one other data, the player is notified as if the output part is changed while one melody continues. You can listen to it. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, at the stage when the normal reach is established, the three data of the first data 306a4, the second data 306a5, and the third data 306a6 are simultaneously started to be reproduced. Since the data for which mute is turned off is switched in the order of the first data 306a4 → the second data 306a5 → the third data 306a6 every time the reach changes to the special reach, voice output is performed while one melody continues. The reach BGM output from the device 226 is gradually flashed from the basic part alone to the basic part + second part and the basic part + third part. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation also from the aspect of music according to the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without using water to improve the expectation of becoming a big hit by BGM as in the conventional pachinko machine Can be enhanced. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved by using the music.

  Also, in the first embodiment, the part to be output as the reach BGM is added by releasing the muted part, thereby gradually boosting the reach BGM. In the embodiment, the part to be added to the basic part can be changed from the second part to the third part to flash the reach BGM gradually. Therefore, in the second embodiment, it is possible to use a method of changing the musical instrument to be used instead of adding it as a method of flashing the reach BGM, and the BGM for reach can be more versatile than in the first embodiment. You can go flashy. However, the third part may be configured as a new part added to the second part. For example, the second part may be composed of a musical instrument part and the third part may be composed of a musical instrument part and a song part.

  In addition, also in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, an aspect in which the change effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is rapidly developed from the normal reach to the special reach is also included. As described above, when developing from normal reach to special reach, in the process of S2335 of the sound editing process (FIG. 26), the mute of the first data 306a4 is set to the sound output LSI 301, and the mute of the third data 306a6 is performed by the process of S2336. The cancellation is set to the sound output LSI 301. As a result, the reach BGM, which has been output from the audio output device 206 only for the basic part so far, is output from the audio output device 226 by the two parts of the basic part and the third part at the timing when the normal reach is developed to the special reach. Be done.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, when the rapid reach is developed from the normal reach to the special reach, the reach BGM output from the voice output device 226 suddenly becomes a flash from the basic part to the basic part + the third part. . As a result, the player can improve the expectation of becoming a big hit at a stretch not only from the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but also by the reach BGM output from the voice output device 226.

  Also in this case, when developing from the normal reach to the special reach, the BGM for reach output from the audio output device 226 is as if from the basic part only the basic part + the third part and the third part while the one melody continues. It will be. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation also from the aspect of music according to the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without using water to improve the expectation of becoming a big hit by BGM as in the conventional pachinko machine Can be enhanced. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved by using the music.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment can exhibit the same function and effect as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

  Here, in the second embodiment, reproduction of three data of the first data 306a4, the second data 306a5, and the third data 306a6 is continuously performed until the final display of the third symbol is made, but With regard to 1 data 306 a 4, reproduction may be stopped when developing to super reach (or special reach without passing super reach), and reproduction of the second data 306 a 5 is stopped when developing to special reach You may As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary reproduction of data in the sound output LSI 301, which leads to a reduction in power consumption. Further, since it is possible to output another audio by opening a channel usable for reproduction, more versatile audio output can be realized. In this case, since the reproduction of the first data 306a4 is stopped when developing to the super reach (or the special reach without passing the super reach), the setting of the mute of the first data 306a4 may be regarded as non-execution. Also, since the reproduction of the second data 306a5 is stopped when developing to the special reach, the setting of the mute of the second data 306a5 may be non-execution.

  In the second embodiment, the first data 306a4 is data for reproducing only the basic part, and the second data 306a5 is data for reproducing the second part configured by the decorative performance together with the basic part. The third data 306a6 has been described as a data for reproducing the third part constituted by the decorative performance of the second part rather than the second part together with the basic part, but the first data 306a4 to the third data The second data 306a5 plays brighter BGM than the first data 306a4 while the basic melody line of the BGM reproduced by the 306a6 is unified, and the third data 306a6 is brighter than the second data 306a5. The second data 306a5 and the third data 306a6 are for playing the BGM of the eyes. It may not contain basic part, even in such a case, it is possible to obtain an effect equivalent to the effects provided by the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. In this case, the second data 306a5 includes, for example, more parts than the number of parts included in the first data 306a4 (the number of parts of the musical instrument or the song). Flashy decorative performances may be performed. In addition, the third data 306a6 is more decorative than the second data 306a5 because the third data 306a6 includes more parts than the number of parts included in the second data 306a5 (the number of musical instruments or song parts). Performance may be performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, as described above, reproduction of the basic part, the upper musical instrument part, and all parts of the song part is started when reach is established, while the upper musical instrument part and song during normal reach MGM for reach by muting the part, unmuting the superior instrument part when developing from normal reach to super reach, and unmuting the singing instrument part when developing from super reach to special reach. We described the case where the BGM is flashed without interrupting the continuity of the.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, reproduction of only the basic part is started when reach is established, and then, when the normal reach is developed to the super reach, the reproduction of the upper instrument part is not from the head Since the reproduction of the reach BGM is started, the reach BGM starts from the time when the reach BGM has been reproduced. In addition, when developing from the super reach to the special reach, the playback of the song part is not from the beginning, but only the time when the reach BGM is played from the start of the play for reach BGM until the development to the special reach Start from where you were.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a part of the sound editing process (S1907) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. The difference between the sound editing process of the third embodiment and the sound editing process of the first embodiment is that, first, as a result of the process of S2305, it is determined that the display type indicated by the display type flag 223b is "normal reach". When it is done (S2305: Yes), the processing of S2341 and S2342 is executed instead of the processing of S2306 and S2307.

  That is, in the process of S2305, when it is determined that the display type indicated by the display type flag 223b is "normal reach" (S2305: Yes), in the third embodiment, first, reproduction of the basic part of reach BGM is performed. The start is set to the sound output LSI 301 (S2341). Then, the reproduction time counter 223c is initialized to 0 (S2342), and the process proceeds to S2320.

  Here, in the first embodiment, the playback time counter 223c is used to count the playback time of the normal BGM and determine whether playback for one bar has been performed, but in the third embodiment In addition to counting the playback time of BGM, it is also used to count the playback time of reach BGM. That is, reach is established, and the reproduction time counter 223c is initialized to 0 by the processing of S2342 together with the start of reproduction of the reach BGM (that is, the reproduction start of the basic part of the reach BGM). Is incremented by one every one millisecond by the processing of S1910 of the main processing (FIG. 22).

  The second difference between the sound editing process of the third embodiment and the sound editing process of the first embodiment is that the display type indicated by the display type flag 223b is "super reach" as a result of the process of S2308. If it is determined that there is (S2308: Yes), the process of S2343 is executed instead of the process of S2309. That is, in the process of S2308, when it is determined that the display type indicated by the display type flag 223b is "super reach" (S2308: Yes), in the third embodiment, the reproduction of the upper instrument part is reproduced. The sound output LSI 301 is set to start from time T1 indicated by the time counter 223c (S2343), and the process proceeds to the processing of S2320.

  The third difference between the sound editing process of the third embodiment and the sound editing process of the first embodiment is that the display type indicated by the display type flag 223b is "special reach" as a result of the process of S2310. If it is determined that there is (S2310: Yes), the process of S2344 is executed instead of the process of S2311. That is, in the process of S2310, when it is determined that the display type indicated by the display type flag 223b is "special reach" (S2310: Yes), in the third embodiment, reproduction of the upper instrument part is performed. If not (that is, when the normal reach is changed to the special reach without passing through the super reach), the sound output LSI 301 starts the reproduction of the upper musical instrument part and the song part from the time T2 indicated by the reproduction time counter 223c. Also, if playback of the musical instrument part is performed (that is, if it has been developed from normal reach to super reach through special reach), playback of the song part is indicated by the playback time counter 223c. The sound output LSI 301 is set to start from T2 (S2344), and the process proceeds to S2320. Row.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 43, the output timing of the reach BGM when reach effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by executing the respective processing of S2305 to S2310 and S2341 to S2344. explain. FIG. 41 is a timing chart showing the output timing of the reach BGM when the special reach is executed through the normal reach and the super reach by the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment.

  As in the first embodiment, while the variable effect is started in the third symbol display device 81 and high-speed variation is performed, the normal BGM is reproduced and output from the sound output LSI 301 and passes through the symbol stop of the left symbol row Z1. The normal BGM is output until the symbol stop of the right symbol row Z3. Then, when the same third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 (see FIG. 4) in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3, when the reach is established, the display control device 114 to the voice lamp control device 113 , A display type command indicating the display type "normal reach" is transmitted. The audio lamp control device 113 receives the display type command and sets the display type flag 223b to "normal reach" by the display command determination process (FIG. 25).

  Then, in the sound editing process (FIG. 42), the process of S2341 is executed, and the reproduction start of the basic part of the reach BGM is set in the sound output LSI 301. As a result, the sound output LSI 301 reads the data of the basic part data 306a1 of the reach BGM data 306a from the audio data ROM 306 and starts the reproduction. At this time, unlike the first embodiment, in the third embodiment, the reproduction of the upper musical instrument part and the song part is not started, the reproduction of only the basic part is started, and only the basic part is an audio output device as a reach BGM. It will be output from 226. Also, when reach is established, the reproduction time counter 223c is initialized to 0 by the processing of S2342. The reproduction time counter 223c counts the time (reproduction time) from when reproduction of the reach BGM is started.

  Next, when super reach is established in the third symbol display device 81, a display type command indicating the display type "super reach" is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 Receives the display type command, and sets the display type flag 223b to "super reach" by the display command determination process (FIG. 25). Then, in the sound editing process (FIG. 42), the process of S2343 is executed, and the reproduction of the musical instrument part is performed for a time T1 indicated by the reproduction time counter 223c, that is, reproduction after the reproduction of the reach BGM is started. The sound output LSI 301 is set to start from time T1. Thereby, the sound output LSI 301 reads the upper instrument part data 306a2 from the audio data ROM 306 from the point of time T1 and starts reproduction, and puts it on the basic part already reproduced for the reproduction time T1. Then, the basic part and the musical instrument part are mixed, and this is output from the audio output device 226 as reach BGM.

  Furthermore, when special reach is established in the third symbol display device 81, a display type command indicating the display type "special reach" is transmitted from the display control device 114 to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 In response to the display type command, the display type flag 223b is set to "special reach" by the display command determination process (FIG. 25). Then, in the sound editing process (FIG. 42), the process of S2344 is executed, and the reproduction of the song part takes a time T2 indicated by the reproduction time counter 223c, that is, the reproduction time T2 from the start of reproduction of the reach BGM. The sound output LSI 301 is set to start from the beginning. As a result, the sound output LSI 301 reads the song part data 306a3 from the voice data ROM 306 from the point of time T2 and starts the reproduction, and covers the basic part and the upper instrument part already reproduced for the reproduction time T2. From the time T2, the basic part, the musical instrument part and the song part are mixed, and this is output from the audio output device 226 as the reach BGM.

  Thereafter, when the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the reproduction of the three parts of the basic part, the upper instrument part and the song part is stopped, and the reproduction of the reach BGM is ended.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the BGM for reach output from the audio output device 226 every time the normal reach changes to the super reach and the super reach changes to the special reach from the basic part only to the basic part + superior item The instrument part, the basic part + the upper instrument part + the song part and so on gradually become more and more flashy. Therefore, when the reach of the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 develops, the player is not limited to the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but also the voice output device 226. With the reach BGM output from, it is possible to improve the expectation of becoming a big hit.

  Here, in the conventional pachinko machine, as described above in the first embodiment, when the BGM is flashed every time it is developed from the normal reach to the super reach and from the super reach to the special reach, it is for normal reach to be reproduced at normal reach. The voice data, the voice data for super reach to be played at super reach, and the voice data for special reach to be played at special reach are separately prepared. Then, when reach (normal reach) is established, playback and output is performed using voice data for normal reach, and when it is developed into super reach, switching from voice data for normal reach (stop playback) and voice for super reach The data is used to play back and output, and when it has developed into a special reach, it switches from the audio data for super reach (stops playback) and plays back using a board with the voice for special reach. However, with this configuration, playback and output of voice data for super reach and voice data for special reach are started when developing to super reach or special reach, so the BGM cues at each timing. Because it is done, the continuity of BGM is interrupted, and it has become a result of putting water on the improvement of the sense of expectation that becomes a big hit.

  On the other hand, when the reach is established, the sound output LSI 301 starts the reproduction of the basic part constituting the reach BGM, counts the reproduction time of the reach BGM using the reproduction time counter 223c, and starts the normal reach In the case of development to the super reach, the reproduction of the musical instrument part starts from the reproduction time T1 of the reach BGM indicated by the reproduction time counter 223c. That is, when developing from the normal reach to the super reach, the superior instrument part is reproduced and output so as to cover the basic part which has been reproduced and output. Also, in the case of progressing from super reach to special reach, the reproduction of the musical instrument part starts from the reproduction time T2 for reach BGM indicated by the reproduction time counter 223c. That is, when developing from the super reach to the special reach, the song part is reproduced and output so as to cover the basic part and the musical instrument part which have been reproduced and output. Thereby, when developing into super reach or special reach, the BGM for reach can be flashed without interruption. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation also from the aspect of music according to the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without using water to improve the expectation of becoming a big hit by BGM as in the conventional pachinko machine Can be enhanced. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved by using the music.

  In addition, also in the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, an aspect is also included in which the change effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is rapidly developed from normal reach to special reach. As described above, when developing from normal reach to special reach, in the process of S2344 in the sound editing process (FIG. 26), the reproduction of the musical instrument part and the reproduction of the song part is a time T2 indicated by the reproduction time counter 223c. The sound output LSI 301 is set to start from the reproduction time T2 after the reproduction of the reach BGM is started. As a result, the sound output LSI 301 reads the upper instrument part data 306a2 from the audio data ROM 306 from time T2 and starts reproduction, and reads the song part data 306a3 from time T2 and starts reproduction. To mix the basic part with the musical instrument part and the song part from time T2 in such a manner that the basic part already reproduced for the reproduction time T2 is output from the audio output device 226 as the BGM for reach Do.

  Therefore, at the timing when the reach BGM, which has been output from the voice output device 206 only for the basic part so far, has progressed from the normal reach to the special reach, the basic instrument part and the song part are covered with the basic instrument part and the reach BGM is covered. It is output from the audio output device 206. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, the BGM for reach output from the audio output device 226, when developing from normal reach to special reach at a stretch, is from the basic part only, the basic part + the musical instrument part + the song part, Suddenly you become a flasher. As a result, the player can improve the expectation of becoming a big hit at a stretch not only from the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but also by the reach BGM output from the voice output device 226.

  Also in this case, when developing from the normal reach to the special reach, the musical instrument part and the song part are reproduced and output in such a manner as to cover the basic parts which have been reproduced and output. Thereby, when developing from a normal reach to a special reach at a stretch, the continuity of the BGM for reach can be flashed without interruption. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation also from the aspect of music according to the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without using water to improve the expectation of becoming a big hit by BGM as in the conventional pachinko machine Can be enhanced. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved by using the music.

  Further, in the third embodiment, only the basic part is played back on the reach BGM in the sound output LSI 301 until reaching the super reach after reaching the reach, and unlike the first embodiment, the upper musical instrument part And playback of the song part is not performed. Further, from the development to the super reach and the development to the special reach, in the sound output LSI 301, reproduction of the reach BGM is performed only for the basic part and the musical instrument part and not for the song part. In addition, also when developing from the normal reach to the special reach at a stretch, in the sound output LSI 301, reproduction of the reach BGM is performed only for the basic part, and unlike the first embodiment, reproduction of the musical instrument part and the song part . Thus, in the third embodiment, it is possible to suppress unnecessary reproduction of data in the sound output LSI 301, which leads to a reduction in power consumption. Further, since it is possible to output another audio by opening a channel usable for reproduction, more versatile audio output can be realized.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment can exhibit the same function and effect as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed. For example, each embodiment adds a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the other embodiment to the embodiment, or replaces it with a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the embodiment. The embodiment may be modified. The first to third embodiments and the following modified examples may be combined as a method of flashing the BGM without interrupting the continuity of the BGM. Further, the numerical values mentioned in each of the above embodiments are merely examples, and it is naturally possible to adopt other numerical values.

  In the second embodiment, as data for reproducing reach BGM, first data 306a4 for reproducing only the basic part, and second data 306a5 for reproducing the second part configured by the decorative performance together with the basic part. First data 306a4 to third data are prepared when the reach is established, and the third data 306a6 for reproducing the third part constituted by the decorative performance of the second part together with the basic part and the basic part. Start all data of 306a5, while muting the second data 306a5 and the third data 306a6 except for the first data 306a4 which reproduces only the basic part during the normal reach, and during the super reach, the basic part and the second Unmute the second data 306a5 for playing back two parts of the part and make the first data 3 6a4 and the third data 306a6 are muted, and during the special reach, the third data 306a5 for reproducing the three parts of the basic part and the third part is released and the first data 306a4 and the second data 306a5 are muted explained. Instead of this, the first data 306a4 is data for reproducing only the basic part, the second data 306a5 is data for reproducing only the second part without the basic part, and the third data 306a6 does not include the basic part. As data for reproducing only the third part, when reach is established, all data of the first data 306a4 to the third data 306a5 are started, and during the normal reach, the second data excluding the first data 306a4 Mute 306a5 and 3rd data 306a6, unmute 2nd data 306a5 and mute only 3rd data 306a6 while super muting is turned off during super reach, and during special reach While the mute of the first data 306a5 is turned off, the second data 306a 5 mute setting may unmute the third data 306A6. Thus, as in the second embodiment, the BGM for reach output from the audio output device 226 every time the normal reach changes to the super reach and the super reach changes to the special reach from the basic part alone to the basic part + the first part It is possible to flash gradually with 2 parts, basic part + 3rd part. Also, even when developing from a normal reach to a special reach without passing through a super reach, the reach BGM output from the audio output device 226 should flash from the basic part only to the basic part + third part at a stretch Can. Since the first data 306a4, the second data 306a5, and the third data 306a6 are simultaneously started when reach is established, the normal reach to the super reach, the super reach to the special reach, or the normal reach to the special reach As the player evolves, even if the second data 306a5 and the third data 306a6 are unmuted or muted, the player is as if the output part is changed while one melody continues. Can be heard. Moreover, in this case, unlike the second embodiment, the first data 306a4 continues from the normal reach to the super reach, from the super reach to the special reach, or from the normal reach to the special reach without being muted. Since the output continues from the audio output device 226, even when the switching of the mute of the second data 306a5 and the third data 306a6 is performed, there is no momentary interruption of BGM. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation also from the aspect of music according to the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without using water to improve the expectation of becoming a big hit by BGM as in the conventional pachinko machine Can be enhanced. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved by using the music.

  The first data 306a4 is data for reproducing only the basic part, the second data 306a5 is data for reproducing only the second part without the basic part, and the third data 306a6 is the third data without the basic part. As data for reproducing only a part, when reach is established, reproduction of only the first data 306a4 is started, and the reproduction time counter 223c is initialized to 0 as in the third embodiment, and the reproduction time of reach BGM is When counting is started and the normal reach is developed to the super reach, while the reproduction of the first data 306a4 is continued, the reproduction of the second data 306a5 starts from the reproduction time T1 of the reach BGM indicated by the reproduction time counter 223c, Continues to play the first data 306a4 when developing from super reach to special reach While stopping the reproduction of the second data 306a5 or muting the output of the second data 306a5 and starting the reproduction of the third data 306a6 from the reproduction time T2 of the reach BGM indicated by the reproduction time counter 223c. Good. Also, when developing from the normal reach to the special reach at a stretch without going through the super reach, while continuing the reproduction of the first data 306a4, the reproduction time of the third data 306a6 is indicated by the reproduction time counter 223c. It may start from T2. Also in this case, each time the normal reach is changed to the super reach, and the super reach is changed to the special reach, the reach BGM output from the audio output device 226 is obtained from the basic part only, the basic part + second part, the basic part + second You can go on stage with 3 parts. Also, even when developing from a normal reach to a special reach without passing through a super reach, the reach BGM output from the audio output device 226 can be flashed from the basic part only to the basic part + third part at a stretch it can. Then, when developing from normal reach to super reach, the second part is reproduced and output so as to cover the basic part that has been reproduced and output until then, and when developing from super reach to special reach, it is reproduced and output until then. The third part is reproduced and output in place of the second part so as to cover the basic part that was being used. Also, when developing from normal reach to special reach all at once, the third part is played back and output in the form of covering the basic part that has been played and output until then. Thereby, when developing into super reach or special reach, the BGM for reach can be flashed without interruption. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation also from the aspect of music according to the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without using water to improve the expectation of becoming a big hit by BGM as in the conventional pachinko machine Can be enhanced. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved by using the music. Also, in this case, the sound output LSI 301 performs only the first data 306a4 in the sound output LSI 301 until reaching the super reach or the special reach after the reach is established, and the progress to the super reach before the special reach Until development, in the sound output LSI 301, only the first data 306a4 and the second data 306a5 are reproduced in the reach BGM. In addition, when the reproduction of the second data 306a5 is stopped when developing to the special reach, after the development to the special reach, in the sound output LSI 301, reproduction of the reach BGM is performed by the first data 306a4 and the third data 306a6. Only do. Thus, in the third embodiment, it is possible to suppress unnecessary reproduction of data in the sound output LSI 301, which leads to a reduction in power consumption. Further, since it is possible to output another audio by opening a channel usable for reproduction, more versatile audio output can be realized.

  Further, in the first data 306a4 to the third data 306a6 prepared as data for reproducing the reach BGM, the second data 306a5 is more than the first data 306a4 while the basic melody line of the BGM to be reproduced is unified. The third data 306a6 is configured to play the second BGM more than the second data 306a5, and when the reach is established, only the first data 306a4 starts to be reproduced. As in the third embodiment, the regeneration time counter 223c is initialized to 0 to start counting the regeneration time of reach BGM, and when the normal reach is developed to the super reach, the regeneration of the first data 306a4 is stopped, or While muting the output of the data 306a4, the reproduction of the second data 306a5 is performed by the reproduction time counter 223c. Starting from the playback time T1 for reach BGM shown, and further developing from the super reach to the special reach, stop the playback of the second data 306a4, or mute the output of the second data 306a4, while the third data The reproduction of the music content 306a6 may be started from the reproduction time T2 of the reach BGM indicated by the reproduction time counter 223c. Also, when developing from the normal reach to the special reach all at once, the playback of the first data 306a4 is stopped or the playback of the third data 306a6 is played back while the output of the first data 306a4 is muted. It may start from the reproduction time T2 of the reach BGM indicated by the time counter 223c. The second data 306a5 includes, for example, more parts than the number of parts included in the first data 306a4 (the number of musical instruments and song parts), and thus the second data 306a5 is more flashy than the first data 306a4. A decorative performance may be performed. In addition, the third data 306a6 is more decorative than the second data 306a5 because the third data 306a6 includes more parts than the number of parts included in the second data 306a5 (the number of musical instruments or song parts). Performance may be performed. Also in this case, it is possible to gradually flash the reach BGM outputted from the voice output device 226 each time the normal reach changes to the super reach and the super reach changes to the special reach. Also, in the case of developing from the normal reach to the special reach without passing through the super reach, the reach BGM output from the voice output device 226 can be flashed at once. Then, when developing from normal reach to super reach, the second data 306a5 is reproduced and output in a form connected to the basic melody line of the first data 306a4 that has been reproduced and output up to that point, and developed from super reach to special reach When doing so, the third data 306a6 is played back and output in a manner connected to the basic melody line of the second data 306a5 that has been played and output until then. Further, when developing from the normal reach to the special reach at a stretch, the third data 306a6 is reproduced and output in a form connected to the basic melody line of the first data 306a4 which has been reproduced and output. Thereby, when developing into super reach or special reach, the BGM for reach can be flashed without interruption. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation also from the aspect of music according to the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without using water to improve the expectation of becoming a big hit by BGM as in the conventional pachinko machine Can be enhanced. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved by using the music. In addition, when the reproduction of the first data 306a4 or the second data 306a5 which has been reproduced up to that time is stopped when developing into super reach or special reach, after reaching reach, until it is developed into super reach or special reach In the sound output LSI 301, only one of the first data 306a4 to the third data 306a6 is played back for the reach BGM. Thus, in the third embodiment, it is possible to suppress unnecessary reproduction of data in the sound output LSI 301, which leads to a reduction in power consumption. Further, since it is possible to output another audio by opening a channel usable for reproduction, more versatile audio output can be realized.

  In the first embodiment described above, when developing from normal reach to super reach, from super reach to special reach, or from normal reach to special reach at once, regardless of the progress of the basic part regeneration, the upper instrument Although the mute of the part or the song part is released, the timing of canceling the mute of the musical instrument part or the song part may be performed by switching (measure head) of the measure of the basic part being reproduced. In addition, the timing of releasing these mutes may be performed at the beginning of the loop of the basic part during loop reproduction. This makes it possible to match the timing at which the instrumental part or song part is added to the basic part, to the bar switching or loop head, so the reach BGM can be flashed in stages in a more natural manner. You can go

  Further, in the second embodiment, when developing from normal reach to super reach, when developing from super reach to special reach, when developing from normal reach to special reach at a stretch, the progress status of the reproduction of the first data 306 a 4 etc. No mute setting or cancellation of the first data 306a4, the second data 306a5, and the third data 306a6 was performed. However, the timing of these mute settings and mute cancellation is changed to the measure of each data being reproduced It may be done by the head). Further, the timing of releasing the mute may be performed at the beginning of the loop of each data during loop reproduction. This makes it possible to match the timing at which the second part and the third part are added to the basic part, to the bar switching and the loop head, so the reach BGM can be flashed in stages in a more natural manner. You can go

  Further, in the third embodiment, when developing from normal reach to super reach, when developing from super reach to special reach, when developing from normal reach to special reach at a stretch, the top instrument regardless of the progress of the basic part regeneration Although the case of starting the reproduction of the part or song part has been described, the reproduction start of these parts may be performed by changing the measure of the basic part in the middle (the beginning of the measure), or the loop is being reproduced. It may be performed at the beginning of the loop of the basic part. This makes it possible to match the timing at which the musical instrument part and the song part are added to the basic part at the change of bars and the head of the loop, so the reach BGM can be flashed in stages in a more natural manner. You can go

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where BGM for reach was flashed in stages was described as an example, but in the embodiments described above in which BGM is flashed in stages without interruption of continuity. The invention can be applied in various situations other than reach BGM.

  For example, for a plurality of fluctuation effects performed in the third symbol display device 81, every time the fluctuation effect is started, every time the fluctuation effect is confirmed and displayed, or in the middle of each fluctuation effect, the BGM to be reproduced The present invention can be applied to the case of flashing. Thereby, while being played continuously without interrupting the BGM over a plurality of fluctuation effects, it can be flashed in stages, so from the music aspect, the jackpot is approached each time the fluctuation effects are performed It is possible to gradually increase the player's sense of expectation of being

  In addition, the stop display of one or more pseudo third symbols (all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are temporarily stopped temporarily. The pseudo stop) during one time the variable effect performed in the third symbol display device 81. The present invention can be applied to the case where the BGM is reproduced every time the pseudo-stop is performed in the pseudo-train in which the third symbol is displayed again after the pseudo-stop. Thus, every time the pseudo-stop is performed, the BGM can be played continuously without interruption, and can be flashed in stages, so from the aspect of music, the game of becoming a big hit in the fluctuation effect It can be raised gradually without interrupting the sense of expectation of the person.

  Further, the present invention can be applied to the case where the BGM is flashed in stages, regardless of the occurrence of reach or pseudo ream, in one time of the variable effect performed in the third symbol display device 81. In particular, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured such that the expectation (reliability) to be a big hit is raised by the BGM becoming gradually flashy, whereby the BGM can be flashed without interruption. By becoming a part of the music, it is possible to gradually increase the player's expectation of becoming a big hit in the variation production from the viewpoint of the music without interruption.

  In addition, during the fluctuation production, or during a predetermined period of the fluctuation production, the player operates the frame button 22 or a button provided separately from the frame button 22 on the upper plate 17 of the pachinko machine 10, etc. In the case of suggesting the player the expectation of becoming a big win in the fluctuation production, the BGM is suggested as the suggested expectation indicates a high expectation or the suggested expectation is gradually improved. The present invention may be applied when flashy. As a result, the BGM becomes louder in combination with the expectation that is suggested on the basis of the player's button operation becoming high without interruption of the BGM, and from the music aspect, there is a jackpot in the variation production. The player's expectation of becoming less can be enhanced without interruption. In addition, regardless of the degree of expectation, during the fluctuation production or during a predetermined period of the fluctuation production, the player can use a button provided separately from the frame button 22 on the frame button 22 or the upper tray 17 of the pachinko machine 10 by the player. The present invention is applied to the case where the BGM is flashed on the basis of the presence or absence of establishment of a predetermined condition determined every time the operation is performed or when the operation is performed. May be If BGM is flashy based on the button operation, if the BGM is pointed out, the continuity of the game may be cut off for the player, and the player may wake up. Based on the background music without being interrupted, the player can be made to operate the button without hesitation in terms of music.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in the fluctuation production performed after the probability variation jackpot is established, only the basic part is output as BGM for the fluctuation production of the first predetermined rotation (for example, 100 rotations), and the predetermined rotation The present invention may be applied to the case where the BGM of the flash is made after the end of the fluctuation effect of the minute, or from the time when the fluctuation effect of the (predetermined number of times +1) rotation (for example, 101st rotation) is started. . As a result, the player is considered to be in a time-saving state while the fluctuation representation for a predetermined number of rotations is being performed after the probability variation big hit by BGM, and it is promoted to a probability variation state after the fluctuation representation for the predetermined number of rotations is finished. Can make the player think. And, in this case, since the BGM changes to a flashy BGM without interruption, the player can enjoy the interval promoted to a definite change state without any foresight, and the joy to the promotion can be increased.

  Moreover, the present invention exemplified in each of the above-described embodiments for making BGM flash in stages without interruption in continuity is applicable not only to pachinko machines but also to other gaming machines such as slot machines. . Here, in the slot machine, for example, the symbols are changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbols are determined and determined by operating the stop button. belongs to. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In such a slot machine, at the timing when the inserted coin is bet and the symbol effective line is determined over a plurality of games, the timing when the operation lever is operated, or part or all of the stop buttons are operated. The present invention can be applied to the case where the BGM is flashed at the specified timing or the like. In this way, the BGM can be gradually flashed without interruptions, so that it is possible to gradually increase the plurality of games without interruption from the viewpoint of music, without interrupting the player's expectation of winning a winning combination.

  Further, the present invention can be applied to the case where the BGM is flashed every time a plurality of stop buttons are operated in one game in the slot machine. In this way, the BGM can be gradually flashed without interruption, and from the music aspect, the expectation of the player to the winning of the part in the game can be gradually increased without interruption. it can.

  In the slot machine, the pressing order of a plurality of stop buttons is determined for each game or the like, and a combination of specific identification information is displayed only when the stop button is operated in the determined pressing order. is there. Then, the pushing order is indicated to the player, and a period called AT (assist time) for assisting the winning of the winning combination, the winning probability of the replay combining is greatly increased, and the pressing order of a plurality of stop buttons is indicated. There is a case in which a period called ART (assist replay time) for assisting the player in winning a winning combination is added. There are also cases in which the period (number of games) to become AT or ART is additionally added by lottery. In such a slot machine, the present invention can be applied to the case where the BGM is flashed at the timing when the effect of the game number addition in which the game number addition lottery is performed is finished. As a result, after the completion of the game number addition, the BGM is switched to the flash effect without interruption, so that the player can be immersed in the aftermath of the game number addition effect without interrupting the feeling from the music aspect. . In this case, the effect of adding the number of games is completed, and the effect of adding the number of games is over, and only when the addition of the number of games is performed (that is, only when the additional number of games is won). The present invention may be applied when the background music is to be flashed. As a result, the player can continue to enjoy the AT or ART period while immersing in the aftermath of winning the game number addition effect without interrupting the feeling in terms of music.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, as a method of selecting a pattern to be used for reproduction for each measure from a plurality of patterns when reproducing normal BGM, it is used in the measure one before the measure to be determined The case has been described where the selection probability of the pattern used in the measure to be determined is changed in accordance with the existing pattern. Instead of this, the pattern to be used in the measure to be determined may be randomly selected.

  In addition, the selection probability of the pattern to be used in the measure to be determined may be changed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (probable change state, time saving state, normal state, etc.) at that time. This makes it easy to select a pattern that was in the gaming state, and can play normal BGM according to the gaming state. Therefore, the player can feel the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 from normal BGM.

  In addition, if the pachinko machine 10 has a so-called latent probability change state (a state in which the player is in a definite change state, but the player does not know whether or not the state is a definite change state), Thus, the selection probability of the pattern used in the measure to be determined may be changed. As a result, since the tendency of the pattern usually used for BGM reproduction varies depending on whether or not the latent probability change state is made, the player may have a sense of expectation that the BGM may be currently in the positive change state. it can.

  In addition, the selection probability of the pattern used in the measure to be determined may be changed for each type of the fluctuation effect (the fluctuation time or the detailed fluctuation pattern). As a result, it is possible to easily select a pattern that is suitable for the type of each variation effect, and it is possible to reproduce normal BGM that is appropriate for each type of variation effect. Further, since the normal BGM having a sense of unity can be reproduced in the variation effect of 1, it is possible to make the player listen to the normal BGM without feeling uncomfortable.

  In addition, the selection probability of the pattern used in the measure to be determined may be changed based on whether or not a jackpot occurs in the change effect being executed. In this way, when the jackpot is to be played, the probability that the BGM will be reproduced by the particular pattern can be increased, so that the player will be the jackpot by listening to the reproduction of the BGM according to the particular pattern. You can increase your sense of expectation. In this case, based on the jackpot type (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, etc.) when becoming a big hit in the fluctuation production under execution, changing the selection probability of the pattern used in the measure to be determined It is also good. As a result, since the player can predict the jackpot type based on the pattern usually used in BGM reproduction, the interest in the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, the selection probability of the pattern used in the measure to be determined may be changed according to whether or not there is a fluctuation effect that results in a big hit among the pending change effects. As a result, when there is a fluctuation effect that makes a big hit in the pending fluctuation effects, the probability that the normal BGM is reproduced by the specific pattern can be made high, so the player can usually make the change according to the specific pattern. By listening to the BGM playback, it is possible to increase the expectation of becoming a jackpot by the on-going fluctuation effect. Further, in this case, the selection probability of the pattern used in the measure to be determined may be changed based on the number of fluctuation effects until the jackpot. This makes it possible to give the player a feeling of approaching the jackpot from the pattern usually used in BGM.

  In the above embodiment, the case of determining the pattern to be used for each measure when reproducing normal BGM has been described, but the pattern to be used for each of a plurality of measures (for example, every two measures) or for each loop is determined. May be Thereby, since the change timing of the pattern is every plural bars or every loop, it is possible to listen to the same pattern for a certain amount of time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling discomfort by changing the rhythm, backing, and the like of the normal BGM in a short time. When a pattern to be used every plurality of bars is determined, data for reproduction corresponding to different patterns may be prepared in the audio data ROM 306 in units of a plurality of bars, or a pattern to be used is determined for each loop. In this case, data for reproduction corresponding to different patterns may be prepared in the voice data ROM 306 in units of loops.

  In each of the above-mentioned embodiments, although the case where one first entry port 64 where the lottery of the big hit is started when the ball enters the ball is disposed in the game board 13, it is not necessarily limited to this. Instead, the game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first ball entrances for which ball entry is detected independently and a jackpot lottery is started. In this case, the holding ball number command transmitted by the main control unit 110 to the sound lamp control unit 113 when there is a hold at each first entrance indicates which first entrance is the hold. Information may be included. In addition, even if the fluctuation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the voice lamp control device 313 when the fluctuation is started, the information indicating which of the first ball entrances is the fluctuation effect reserved by the first ball entrance is included. Good. Thereby, in the voice lamp control device 113, a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first entrance, and when the reserved ball number command is received, the first ball entry indicated in the reserved ball number command If you set the number of holding balls in the number of holding balls counter for the mouth and receive the fluctuation pattern command, if you decrease the number of holding balls counter for the first entrance indicated in the fluctuation pattern command by 1, the first ball entrance The number of holding balls can be counted every time.

  In addition, when a plurality of first ball entrances are provided, a part of the first ball entrances is provided with a wing member for an enlargement / reduction operation (or opening / closing operation), and the wing member is in an enlarged state (or Even when the ball is in the open state, the ball is likely to enter the ball, and when the blade member is in the contracted state (or in the closed state), the ball is difficult to enter (or can not enter). Good. At this time, when the gaming state is in the definite change state or the short time state in this part of the first ball entrance, the wing members are in the expanded state (or the open state) than in the normal state. It may be configured easily. On the other hand, the other first ball entrance may have no blade member, and may be in a state where the ball can easily enter the ball at all times. In addition, when it becomes big hit as a result of big hit drawing which is done with the entry to the part 1st entering ball entrance, as a result of the big hit drawing which is done with the entry to the other 1st entering ball entrance It may be configured that jackpots of a type advantageous to the player (for example, 15R probability variation jackpots) are more easily selected than in the case where When the pachinko machine has these configurations, when the gaming state is the normal state, the ball is made to enter the other first ball entry port, and the ball is given to the player so that the big hit lottery is performed a lot If it is fired, and the gaming state is a definite change state or a normal state, the ball is inserted into the first ball entry into which the blade member is likely to be expanded, and a jackpot of a type advantageous to the player can be obtained. The player can fire the ball. Therefore, since the variation can be given to the manner of the game in the player, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In addition, when a plurality of first ball entrances are provided, the fluctuation effects held corresponding to the ball entry into some of the first ball entrances are entered into other first ball entrances. It may be executed in preference to the change effect reserved for the ball. In particular, if a jackpot lottery results with a part of the first ball entry into the jackpot will result in a jackpot, a jackpot of a type advantageous to the player (for example, 15R probability variation jackpot) is likely to be selected When it is configured, a priority is given to the player by preferentially executing the fluctuation effects that are held corresponding to the entering of a part of the first ball entry into the first entrance. The jackpot can be made easier to be awarded. Thus, the player's expectation can be enhanced.

  In the above embodiments, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, in the start-up process performed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, initial values are stored in various flags and memories provided in the RAM 223. The case of being set (S1810 in FIG. 21) and being initialized has been described. That is, in the above-described embodiments, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off once and turned on again, the case where the voice lamp control device 113 always starts operating from the initial state has been described. On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 determines the gaming state (normal state, positive change state, time saving state, etc.) of the pachinko machine 10 backed up in the main control device 110 The number of holding balls is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a command, and the voice lamp control device 113 sets values in various flags, memories, etc. provided in the RAM 223 according to the command received from the main control device 110. You may do so. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 performs voice output and lamp output reflecting the state backed up by the main control device 110 immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and to the display control device 114. On the other hand, it is possible to instruct the third symbol display device 81 to display an image reflecting the state backed up by the main control device 110. Thus, for example, when a momentary power failure occurs, the player can safely play the game since voice output, lamp output, and image display on the third symbol display device 81 are performed from the state immediately before the power failure. Can continue.

  In each of the above embodiments, the display control device 114 has described the case of preparing the display data table for each fluctuation pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Prepare a display data table for each element such as "Change start", "High speed change", "Advance notice effect", "Normal reach", "Super reach", according to the change pattern indicated in the display change pattern command After identifying the elements necessary for the fluctuation production, the display data tables corresponding to the elements required for the fluctuation production identified are combined into one, and the final periodic display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is generated You may do it. For "variation start", "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach", etc., a display common to each fluctuation pattern is often performed. Therefore, the data table can be efficiently provided by elementizing the fluctuation effect in this way and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element.

  In each of the above embodiments, the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every display interval of an image of one frame for ending the drawing process (every 20 milliseconds in each of the above embodiments). However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image of one frame. Since the driving of the third symbol display device 81 is always performed so that an image of one frame is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), a V interrupt signal is generated for each display of an image of one frame. By sending, it is possible to keep accurate without having to time its time interval.

  In each of the above embodiments, the image controller 237 specifies a frame buffer to which the drawn image is to be expanded based on the drawing object buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image expanded from the other frame buffer earlier. Although the case where information is read and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the frame in which the image controller 237 should expand the drawn image every time it receives the drawing list The buffers may be alternately selected, and the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and may be transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Also, each time the image controller 237 transmits the image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 and the frame buffer to which the drawn image should be expanded. The frame buffer to be used may be switched.

  Although said each embodiment demonstrated the case where the 3rd symbol which consists of the main symbols which the numbers of "0" to "9" were not attached is made to stop-display demonstration effect, but what is necessarily limited to this Instead, the third symbol consisting of a numbered main symbol or a non-numbered main symbol may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. In addition, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. In addition, a character or a back image that is completely different from the third pattern or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the display data table has described the case where the content (drawing content) of the image to be drawn at that time is defined corresponding to the time in which 20 milliseconds are represented as one unit. The display content is not limited to the above, and any display content may be defined at predetermined time intervals. The predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30 seconds. Since an image of one frame is displayed each time, the display data table may define display contents at intervals of 1/30 seconds.

  Further, in the display data table, as a sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals, an address of the character ROM 234 where image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored instead of instructing the sprite type itself. May be defined. The display control device 114 reads the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. I manage the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is defined as the display content defined for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. There is no need to manage both the information specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, so that the processing load can be reduced.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case of displaying a high-speed variation in which all symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player can not visually recognize is displayed. In this case, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced and displayed to an extent that they can not be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which a large number of white points are displayed randomly.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the holding ball number counter 223a is reduced by one, but it is not necessarily limited thereto. Not For example, in the fluctuation process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the value of the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control unit 110 subtracted according to the fluctuation pattern command being set by the fluctuation start process (S1207) Even if the ball holding ball number command is set to be transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sound lamp control unit 113 and the holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sound lamp control unit 113 Good. Thus, the sound lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the number of holding balls held by the main control device 110.

  In the above embodiments, each command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113, and the display control unit 114 is instructed to display from the audio lamp control unit 113. The command may be sent directly from the main control unit 110 to the display control unit 114. In addition, a voice lamp control device is connected to the display control device, and a command to instruct output of each voice and lighting of the lamp from the display control device, and an accessory operation start command to instruct operation start of the bonus It may be configured to transmit to the control device. At this time, the display control device determines a detailed change pattern based on the command received directly from the main control device 110, and the display control device sends an audio lamp control device to the sound lamp control device based on the detailed change pattern. It is also possible to transmit commands for instructing the output of each voice, the lighting / blinking of the lamp, and the operation start of the movable part.

  Furthermore, the audio lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By making these into one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and the cost increase of the pachinko machine can be suppressed. When the audio lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, a flag is generated instead of the command generated by the audio lamp control device 113 and notified to the display control device 114, and based on the flag The display data table may be set in the display data table buffer 233a, or various image data such as reserved image data may be generated. Also, instead of the display type command generated by the display control unit 114 and notified to the audio lamp control unit 113, a display type flag is generated, and based on the display type flag, audio output, lamp lighting / blinking, The operation of the first character 87 may be controlled.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, winnings to the first entrance 64 and passage of the ball to the second entrance 67 are each held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum number of holding balls Is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). In addition, the number of holding balls of the fluctuation effect based on the winning into the first ball entrance 64, the part divided by the number or four in a part of the third symbol display device 81 by the number of holding balls It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of holding balls is notified by the light emitting member You may configure it.

  In addition, as shown in each of the above-mentioned embodiments, the fluctuation effect which is a kind of dynamic display is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbols as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The symbol may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a lateral direction or an L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of symbols, and, for example, one or more characters may be displayed in various ways along with the symbols or in addition to the symbols, or may be displayed in various ways. It also includes the effect display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, twice and three times) May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  The "reach" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "predetermined effect" described in the claims and the following respective game machines, and the "reach BGM" and the "normal BGM" described in the above embodiment Corresponds to the “predetermined music” described in the claims and the respective gaming machines described below, and the “super reach” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “first” described in the claims and the following gaming machines The "special reach" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the claim and the "second state" described in each of the following gaming machines, and the "big hit" described in the above embodiment is a patent. It corresponds to the "predetermined game value" described in the claims and each of the following gaming machines, and the "third symbol" described in the above embodiment refers to the "identification" described in the claims and each following gaming machine It corresponds to "information".

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

Perform effects based on the progress of the game based on control by the main control means that performs main control of the game, a sub control means that operates based on a signal transmitted from the main control means, and the sub control means In a gaming machine comprising: an effect executing means; and an audio output means for outputting an audio based on control by the sub-control means,
The sub-control means
An audio output control means for controlling the output of the audio from the audio output means;
The voice output control means is
And a first means for controlling to output predetermined music from the voice output means when the predetermined effect is executed by the effect execution means.
The first means is
When the predetermined effect is in the first state, control is performed to increase the part of the sound played by the predetermined music while maintaining the melody played by the predetermined music. A game machine A1.

  According to the gaming machine A1, main control of the game is executed by the main control means. Under the control of the sub control means operating based on the signal transmitted from the main control means, the effect executing means executes the effect based on the progress of the game. Further, under the control of the audio output control means provided in the sub control means, the audio is outputted from the audio output means. Here, when the predetermined effect is executed by the effect execution means, the predetermined music is outputted from the sound output means under the control of the first means of the sound output control means. Then, when the predetermined effect is in the first state, the control by the first means is performed so that the part of the sound played with the predetermined music increases while the melody played with the predetermined music is maintained. To be done. This makes it possible to energize predetermined music without interrupting the continuity of predetermined music, so that the player feels the excitement of the predetermined effect without interrupting the player's feelings by the predetermined music. It can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved by using the music.

In the gaming machine A1,
The voice output control means
Storage means for storing voice data for outputting voice from the voice output means;
The voice data stored in the storage means is
First data for reproducing the first part of the predetermined music and second data for reproducing the second part of the predetermined music as audio data for outputting the predetermined music from the audio output means And at least
The first means is
The first part and the second part of the predetermined music on the basis of at least the first data and the second data triggered by the start of the execution of the predetermined effect by the effect executing means. Reproduction start means for starting reproduction of
Mute means for muting the output of the second part whose reproduction is started by the reproduction start means;
A gaming machine A2 comprising mute releasing means for releasing mute of the second part whose output has been muted by the muting means in response to the predetermined effect being brought into the first state;

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the music output control means stores voice data for outputting voice from the voice output means. In the voice storage means, as voice data for outputting the predetermined music from the voice output means, the first data for reproducing the first part of the predetermined music and the second part of the predetermined music are reproduced. And at least two data. Then, when the execution of the predetermined effect by the effect execution means is started, the first of the predetermined music is triggered based on that at least based on the first data and the second data stored in the storage means. The reproduction of the part and the second part is started by the reproduction start means. On the other hand, the output of the second part whose reproduction is started by the reproduction start means is muted by the mute means. Then, in response to the predetermined effect being in the first state, the muting of the second part is canceled by the mute canceling means. Thus, when the predetermined effect is executed by the effect executing means, the reproduction of the first part and the second part of the predetermined music is started based on at least the first data and the second data. However, initially, the output of the second part is muted, and the first part is output from the audio output means. Then, when the predetermined effect is in the first state, the muting of the second part is released, and the first part and the second part are simultaneously output as the predetermined music. Thereby, when the predetermined effect is in the first state, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the part of the sound played with the predetermined music without interruption of the continuity of the predetermined music.

  The first part may be composed of one part or may be composed of a plurality of parts. Similarly, the second part may be configured by one part or may be configured by a plurality of parts.

In the gaming machine A2,
The voice data stored in the storage means is
As audio data for outputting the predetermined music from the audio output means, in addition to the first data and the second data, at least third data for reproducing the third part of the predetermined music is included. Including
The reproduction start means is triggered to start execution of the predetermined effect by the effect execution means, based on at least the first data, the second data and the third data. Start playing the first part, the second part and the third part of music;
The muting means mutes the output of the second part and the third part whose reproduction has been started by the reproduction start means,
The mute canceling means cancels the mute of the third part whose output is muted by the muting means in response to the predetermined effect becoming the second state after the first state. Game machine A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the audio storage means reproduces the first data for reproducing the first part of the predetermined music and the second part of the predetermined music as audio data for outputting the predetermined music from the audio output means In addition to the second data, at least third data for reproducing the third part of the predetermined music is included. Then, when the execution of the predetermined effect by the effect executing means is started, the predetermined event is triggered based on at least the first data, the second data and the third data stored in the storage means. The reproduction of the first, second and third parts of music is started by the reproduction start means. On the other hand, the outputs of the second part and the third part whose reproduction has been started by the reproduction start means are muted by the mute means. When the predetermined effect is in the first state, the muting of the second part is canceled by the mute canceling means, and when the predetermined effect is in the second state after the first state, The mute of the third part is released by the mute release means. Thus, when the predetermined effect is executed by the effect executing means, based on at least the first data, the second data and the third data, the first part, the second part and the third part of the predetermined music are provided. Although the reproduction of the part is started, the outputs of the second part and the third part are muted at first, and the first part is outputted from the audio output means. Then, when the predetermined effect is in the first state, the muting of the second part is released, and the first part and the second part are simultaneously output as the predetermined music. Furthermore, when the predetermined effect is in the second state, muting of the third part is also released, and the first part, the second part and the third part are simultaneously output as the predetermined music. As a result, as the predetermined effect becomes the first state and the second state, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the part of the sound played with the predetermined music without interruption of the continuity of the predetermined music.

  The third part may be composed of one part, or may be composed of a plurality of parts, like the first part and the second part.

In the gaming machine A2,
The voice data stored in the storage means is
It is a part that constitutes the predetermined music in addition to the first data and the second data as audio data for outputting the predetermined music from the audio output means, and is more than the second part At least includes fourth data for reproducing the fourth part having a large number of parts included,
The reproduction start means is triggered to start the execution of the predetermined effect by the effect execution means, and the predetermined is performed based on at least the first data, the second data and the fourth data. Start playing the first part, the second part and the fourth part of music;
The muting means mutes the output of the second part and the third part whose reproduction has been started by the reproduction start means,
The muting cancellation means cancels the muting of the fourth part whose output is muted by the muting means, triggered by the predetermined effect becoming the second state after the first state.
The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the muting means mutes the output of the second part whose muting has been canceled by the muting canceling means in response to the predetermined effect being brought into the second state.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the audio storage means reproduces the first data for reproducing the first part of the predetermined music and the second part of the predetermined music as audio data for outputting the predetermined music from the audio output means In addition to the second data, at least fourth data for reproducing a fourth part, which is a part that constitutes predetermined music and that includes more putters than the second part, is included. Then, when the execution of the predetermined effect by the effect execution means is started, the predetermined event is triggered based on at least the first data, the second data and the fourth data stored in the storage means. The reproduction of the first, second and fourth parts of music is started by the reproduction start means. On the other hand, the outputs of the second part and the fourth part whose reproduction has been started by the reproduction start means are muted by the mute means. Then, in response to the predetermined effect being in the first state, the muting of the second part is canceled by the mute canceling means. Furthermore, in response to the predetermined effect becoming the second state after the first state, the muting of the fourth part is canceled by the mute canceling means, while the output of the second part whose muting has been canceled is muted. Mute by means. Thus, when the predetermined effect is executed by the effect executing means, based on at least the first data, the second data and the fourth data, the first part, the second part and the fourth part of the predetermined music are provided. Although the reproduction of the part is started, the outputs of the second part and the fourth part are muted at first and the first part is outputted from the audio output means. Then, when the predetermined effect is in the first state, the muting of the second part is released, and the first part and the second part are simultaneously output as the predetermined music. Furthermore, when the predetermined effect is in the second state, the second part is muted, but the muting of the fourth part, which includes more parts than the second part, is canceled, and the first part The fourth part is output simultaneously. As a result, as the predetermined effect becomes the first state and the second state, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the part of the sound played with the predetermined music without interruption of the continuity of the predetermined music.

In the gaming machine A1,
The voice output control means
Storage means for storing voice data for outputting voice from the voice output means;
The voice data stored in the storage means is
First data for reproducing a first part of the predetermined music as audio data for outputting the predetermined music from the audio output means, and a part constituting the predetermined music, the first part At least second data for reproducing a second part having a greater number of parts included,
The first means is
The first part and the second part of the predetermined music on the basis of at least the first data and the second data triggered by the start of the execution of the predetermined effect by the effect executing means. Reproduction start means for starting reproduction of
Mute means for muting the output of the second part whose reproduction is started by the reproduction start means;
And a mute release unit configured to release the mute of the second part whose output is muted by the mute unit when the predetermined effect is in the first state.
The gaming machine A5, wherein the muting means mutes the output of the first part in response to the predetermined effect becoming in the first state.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the music output control means stores voice data for outputting voice from the voice output means. The voice storage means includes, as voice data for outputting the predetermined music from the voice output means, first data for reproducing the first part of the predetermined music and a part constituting the predetermined music. At least the second data for reproducing the second part that includes more parts than one part is included. Then, when the execution of the predetermined effect by the effect execution means is started, the first of the predetermined music is triggered based on that at least based on the first data and the second data stored in the storage means. The reproduction of the part and the second part is started by the reproduction start means. On the other hand, the output of the second part whose reproduction is started by the reproduction start means is muted by the mute means. Then, in response to the predetermined effect being in the first state, the muting of the second part is canceled by the mute releasing means, while the output of the first part is muted by the muting means. Thus, when the predetermined effect is executed by the effect executing means, the reproduction of the first part and the second part of the predetermined music is started based on at least the first data and the second data. However, initially, the output of the second part is muted, and the first part is output from the audio output means. Then, when the predetermined effect is in the first state, the muting of the second part is released, and the output of the first part is muted. That is, the second part having a larger number of parts included than the first part is output from the audio output means. Thereby, when the predetermined effect is in the first state, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the part of the sound played with the predetermined music without interruption of the continuity of the predetermined music.

  The first part may be composed of one part or may be composed of a plurality of parts.

In the gaming machine A5,
The voice data stored in the storage means is
It is a part that constitutes the predetermined music in addition to the first data and the second data as audio data for outputting the predetermined music from the audio output means, and is more than the second part At least includes fifth data for reproducing the fifth part including a large number of parts included,
The reproduction start means is triggered to start execution of the predetermined effect by the effect execution means, based on at least the first data, the second data and the fifth data. Start playing the first part, the second part and the fifth part of music;
The muting means mutes the output of the second part and the fifth part whose reproduction has been started by the reproduction start means,
The mute release means releases the mute of the fifth part whose output is muted by the mute means, triggered by the predetermined effect becoming the second state after the first state.
A game machine A6 characterized in that the mute unit mutes the output of the second part whose mute release has been canceled by the mute release unit when the predetermined effect is in the second state.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5, the following effects are exerted. That is, the voice storage means is a part that constitutes the predetermined music in addition to the first data and the second data as audio data for outputting the predetermined music from the audio output means, the second part At least the fifth data for reproducing the fifth part, which includes more putters, is included. Then, when execution of the predetermined effect by the effect execution means is started, the predetermined event is triggered based on at least the first data, the second data and the fifth data stored in the storage means. The reproduction of the first, second and fifth parts of music is started by the reproduction start means. On the other hand, the outputs of the second part and the fifth part whose reproduction has been started by the reproduction start means are muted by the mute means. Then, in response to the predetermined effect being in the first state, the muting of the second part is canceled by the mute canceling means, and the output of the first part is muted by the muting means. Furthermore, in response to the predetermined effect becoming the second state after the first state, the muting of the fifth part is canceled by the mute canceling means, and the output of the second part whose mute is canceled is the muting means Muted. Thus, when the predetermined effect is executed by the effect executing means, based on at least the first data, the second data and the fourth data, the first part, the second part and the fifth part of the predetermined music are provided. Although the reproduction of the part is started, the outputs of the second part and the fourth part are muted at first and the first part is outputted from the audio output means. Then, when the predetermined effect is in the first state, the output of the first part is muted, but the muting of the second part having a larger number of parts than the first part is canceled, and the predetermined music is given as the first music. Two parts are output. Furthermore, when the predetermined effect is in the second state, the second part is muted, but the fifth part, which includes more parts than the second part, is unmuted and the fifth part is selected as the predetermined music. It is output. As a result, as the predetermined effect becomes the first state and the second state, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the part of the sound played with the predetermined music without interruption of the continuity of the predetermined music.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6,
The muting cancellation means cancels muting when reproduction of the predetermined music has switched to a measure after the predetermined effect becomes the first state or the second state.
The muting means is characterized in that the muting is set when the reproduction of the predetermined music becomes a change of bars after the predetermined effect becomes the first state or the second state. Gaming machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the release of the mute by the mute release means and the setting of the mute by the mute means are performed when the reproduction of the predetermined music becomes the change of the measure after the predetermined effect becomes the first state or the second state. . As a result, as the predetermined effect becomes the first state and the second state, when the continuity of the predetermined music is not interrupted and the part of the sound played with the predetermined music is increased, the increase of the part is Since this is performed by switching bars, there is an effect that the player can hear the increase of the part in a natural manner.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6,
The audio output control means outputs the predetermined music to the end by the partial data when outputting the predetermined music using at least a part of data of the first data to the fifth data. When it is reproduced, loop reproduction is performed to reproduce the predetermined music from the beginning again,
The mute canceling means cancels the mute when the predetermined music is to be reproduced from the beginning after the predetermined effect becomes the first state or the second state.
The muting means sets the mute when the predetermined music is to be reproduced from the beginning after the predetermined effect becomes the first state or the second state. A game machine A8.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the following effects are exerted. That is, when the predetermined music is output using at least a part of the first data to the fifth data, if the predetermined music is reproduced to the end by the part of the data, the predetermined music is reproduced from the beginning again The audio reproduction control means performs loop reproduction in which predetermined music is reproduced. And the release of the mute by the mute releasing means and the setting of the mute by the mute means are performed when the predetermined music is to be reproduced from the beginning after the predetermined effect becomes the first state or the second state. It will be. As a result, as the predetermined effect becomes the first state and the second state, when the continuity of the predetermined music is not interrupted and the part of the sound played with the predetermined music is increased, the increase of the part is Since it is performed at the beginning of the loop, the player can listen to the increase of the part in a natural manner.

In the gaming machine A1,
The voice output control means
Storage means for storing voice data for outputting voice from the voice output means;
The voice data stored in the storage means is
First data for reproducing the first part of the predetermined music and second data for reproducing the second part of the predetermined music as audio data for outputting the predetermined music from the audio output means And at least
The first means is
Reproduction start means for starting reproduction of the first part of the predetermined music based on the first data, triggered by the start of execution of the predetermined effect by the effect execution means;
Counting means for counting an elapsed time from when the output of the predetermined music is started with the start of reproduction of the first part by the reproduction start means;
The second part is started to be reproduced from a location corresponding to the elapsed time counted by the counting means based on the second data, triggered by the predetermined effect being in the first state. A game machine B1 comprising: reproduction start means.

  According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the music output control means stores voice data for outputting voice from the voice output means. In the voice storage means, as voice data for outputting the predetermined music from the voice output means, the first data for reproducing the first part of the predetermined music and the second part of the predetermined music are reproduced. And at least two data. Then, when the execution of the predetermined effect by the effect execution means is started, the first part of the predetermined music is started by the reproduction start means based on the first data stored in the storage means Be done. In addition, the counting means counts an elapsed time from the start of the output of the predetermined music with the start of the reproduction of the first part. On the other hand, from the point corresponding to the elapsed time from the start of the output of the predetermined music counted by the counting means based on the second data, triggered by the predetermined effect being in the first state, The reproduction of the two parts is started by the second reproduction start means. Thereby, when the predetermined effect is executed by the effect execution means, the first part is outputted as the predetermined music from the voice output means, and when the predetermined effect is in the first state, the output of the predetermined music at that time is started The second part is output together with the first part from the location corresponding to the elapsed time based on the elapsed time since it was done. Therefore, when the predetermined effect is in the first state, the part of the sound played with the predetermined music can be increased without interruption of the continuity of the predetermined music.

  The first part may be composed of one part or may be composed of a plurality of parts. Similarly, the second part may be configured by one part or may be configured by a plurality of parts.

In the gaming machine B1,
The voice data stored in the storage means is
As audio data for outputting the predetermined music from the audio output means, in addition to the first data and the second data, at least third data for reproducing the third part of the predetermined music is included. Including
The first means is
Triggered by the fact that the predetermined effect has become the second state after the first state, the part corresponding to the elapsed time counted by the counting means on the basis of the third data starts from the third part A third reproduction start means for starting reproduction, and a game machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the audio storage means reproduces the first data for reproducing the first part of the predetermined music and the second part of the predetermined music as audio data for outputting the predetermined music from the audio output means In addition to the second data, at least third data for reproducing the third part of the predetermined music is included. Then, when the predetermined effect is in the second state, from that point onward based on the third data, from the point corresponding to the elapsed time from the start of the output of the predetermined music counted by the counting means The reproduction of the third part is started by the third reproduction start means. Thereby, when the predetermined effect is executed by the effect execution means, the first part is outputted as the predetermined music from the voice output means, and when the predetermined effect is in the first state, the output of the predetermined music at that time is started The second part is output together with the first part from the location corresponding to the elapsed time based on the elapsed time since it was done. Furthermore, when the predetermined effect is in the second state, the third part is the first part and the second part from the portion corresponding to the elapsed time based on the elapsed time since the output of the predetermined music at that time was started. It is output together with the part. Therefore, as the predetermined effect becomes the first state and the second state, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the part of the sound played with the predetermined music without interruption of the continuity of the predetermined music.

  The third part may be composed of one part, or may be composed of a plurality of parts, like the first part and the second part.

In the gaming machine B1,
The voice data stored in the storage means is
It is a part that constitutes the predetermined music in addition to the first data and the second data as audio data for outputting the predetermined music from the audio output means, and is more than the second part At least includes fourth data for reproducing the fourth part having a large number of parts included,
The first means is
The output of the second part based on the second data is stopped when the predetermined effect is brought to the second state after the first state, and the counting means is based on the fourth data. And fourth reproduction start means for starting reproduction of the fourth part from a point corresponding to the elapsed time counted by the game machine B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the audio storage means reproduces the first data for reproducing the first part of the predetermined music and the second part of the predetermined music as audio data for outputting the predetermined music from the audio output means In addition to the second data, at least fourth data for reproducing a fourth part that constitutes a predetermined music and includes more parts than the second part is included. Then, when the predetermined effect is in the second state, the output of the second part based on the second data started to be reproduced by the second reproduction start means is stopped in response to that, and the output of the second part is stopped based on the fourth data. The reproduction of the fourth part is started by the fourth reproduction starting means from a point corresponding to an elapsed time from the start of the output of the predetermined music counted by the counting means. Thereby, when the predetermined effect is executed by the effect execution means, the first part is outputted as the predetermined music from the voice output means, and when the predetermined effect is in the first state, the output of the predetermined music at that time is started The second part is output together with the first part from the location corresponding to the elapsed time based on the elapsed time since it was done. Furthermore, when the predetermined effect is in the second state, the output of the second part is stopped, and based on the elapsed time since the start of the output of the predetermined music at that time, from the location corresponding to the elapsed time, The fourth part, which includes more parts than the second part, is output together with the first part. Therefore, as the predetermined effect becomes the first state and the second state, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the part of the sound played with the predetermined music without interruption of the continuity of the predetermined music.

In the gaming machine A1,
The voice output control means
Storage means for storing voice data for outputting voice from the voice output means;
The voice data stored in the storage means is
First data for reproducing a first part of the predetermined music as audio data for outputting the predetermined music from the audio output means, and a part constituting the predetermined music, the first part And at least fifth data for reproducing the fifth part having a greater number of parts included,
The first means is
Reproduction start means for starting reproduction of the first part of the predetermined music based on the first data, triggered by the start of execution of the predetermined effect by the effect execution means;
Counting means for counting an elapsed time from when the output of the predetermined music is started with the start of reproduction of the first part by the reproduction start means;
The output of the first part based on the first data is stopped when the predetermined effect is in the first state, and the progress counted by the counting means based on the fifth data And fifth reproduction start means for starting reproduction of the fifth part from a location corresponding to a time.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the music output control means stores voice data for outputting voice from the voice output means. The voice storage means includes, as voice data for outputting the predetermined music from the voice output means, first data for reproducing the first part of the predetermined music and a part constituting the predetermined music. At least the fifth data for reproducing the fifth part in which the number of parts included is more than one part is included. Then, when the execution of the predetermined effect by the effect execution means is started, the first part of the predetermined music is started by the reproduction start means based on the first data stored in the storage means Be done. In addition, the counting means counts an elapsed time from the start of the output of the predetermined music with the start of the reproduction of the first part. On the other hand, the output of the first part based on the first data whose reproduction is started by the reproduction start means is stopped when the predetermined effect is in the first state, and the counting means is based on the fifth data. The reproduction of the fifth part is started by the fifth reproduction start means from a location corresponding to the elapsed time from the start of the output of the predetermined music counted by the. Thereby, when the predetermined effect is executed by the effect execution means, the first part is outputted from the sound output means as the predetermined music, and when the predetermined effect becomes the first state, the output of the first part is stopped, Based on the elapsed time since the start of the output of the predetermined music at that time, the fifth part in which the number of parts included is more than the first part is output from the part corresponding to the elapsed time. Therefore, when the predetermined effect is in the first state, the part of the sound played with the predetermined music can be increased without interruption of the continuity of the predetermined music.

  The first part may be composed of one part or may be composed of a plurality of parts.

In the gaming machine B4,
The voice data stored in the storage means is
It is a part constituting the predetermined music in addition to the first data and the fifth data as audio data for outputting the predetermined music from the audio output means, and is a part more than the fifth part At least includes sixth data for reproducing the sixth part including a large number of parts included,
The first means is
The output of the fifth part based on the fifth data is stopped when the predetermined effect is brought to the second state after the first state, and the counting means is based on the sixth data. And sixth reproduction start means for starting reproduction of the sixth part from a location corresponding to the elapsed time counted by the game machine B5.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B4, the following effects are exerted. That is, the sound storage means reproduces the first data for reproducing the first part of the predetermined music and the fifth part of the predetermined music as the audio data for outputting the predetermined music from the audio output means. In addition to the fifth data, at least sixth data is included that reproduces a sixth part that constitutes a predetermined music and includes more parts than the fifth part. Then, when the predetermined effect is in the second state, the output of the fifth part based on the fifth data started to be reproduced by the fifth reproduction start means is stopped in response to that, and the output of the fifth part is stopped based on the sixth data. The reproduction of the sixth part is started by the sixth reproduction starting means from a point corresponding to the elapsed time from the start of the output of the predetermined music counted by the counting means. Thereby, when the predetermined effect is executed by the effect execution means, the first part is outputted from the sound output means as the predetermined music, and when the predetermined effect becomes the first state, the output of the first part is stopped, Based on the elapsed time since the start of the output of the predetermined music at that time, the 5th part in which the number of parts included more than the 1st part is output is output from the location corresponded to the elapsed time. Furthermore, when the predetermined effect is in the second state, the output of the fifth part is stopped, and based on the elapsed time since the start of the output of the predetermined music at that time, from the location corresponding to the elapsed time, The sixth part, which includes more parts than the fifth part, is output. Therefore, as the predetermined effect becomes the first state and the second state, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the part of the sound played with the predetermined music without interruption of the continuity of the predetermined music.

In any of gaming machines B3 to B5,
Any one of the fourth reproduction start means to the sixth reproduction start means stops the output of the first part, the second part or the fifth part by stopping the reproduction of the corresponding part. A game machine B6 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine B6, in any of the gaming machines B3 to B5, any of the fourth to sixth reproduction start means stops the output of the first part, the second part or the fifth part, Since the reproduction is performed by stopping the reproduction of the corresponding part, it is possible to suppress the useless reproduction.

In any of gaming machines B3 to B5,
Any one of the fourth reproduction start means to the sixth reproduction start means stops the output of the first part, the second part or the fifth part by muting the output of the corresponding part A game machine B7 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in any one of the gaming machines B3 to B5, any of the fourth to sixth reproduction start means stops the output of the first part, the second part or the fifth part, Since the configuration is performed by muting the output of the corresponding part, there is an effect that the output can be stopped instantaneously.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7,
In any of the second reproduction start means to the sixth reproduction start means, after the predetermined effect becomes the first state or the second state, the reproduction of the predetermined music becomes a bar change. By the way, the game machine B8 characterized in that the reproduction of any one of the sixth part from the second part is started, and the output of the first part, the second part or the fifth part is stopped.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the following effects are exerted. That is, any one of the second reproduction start means to the sixth reproduction start means is the second one when the predetermined music reproduction becomes the bar change after the predetermined effect becomes the first state or the second state. It is configured to start reproduction of any of the part to the sixth part and to stop the output of the first part, the second part or the fifth part. As a result, as the predetermined effect becomes the first state and the second state, when the continuity of the predetermined music is not interrupted and the part of the sound played with the predetermined music is increased, the increase of the part is Since this is performed by switching bars, there is an effect that the player can hear the increase of the part in a natural manner.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7,
The audio output control means outputs the predetermined music to the end by the partial data when outputting the predetermined music using at least a part of the first data to a part of the sixth data. When it is reproduced, loop reproduction is performed to reproduce the predetermined music from the beginning again,
Any one of the second reproduction start means to the sixth reproduction start means may reproduce the predetermined music from the head after the predetermined effect becomes the first state or the second state. In the game machine, the reproduction of any one of the second part to the sixth part is started, and the output of the first part, the second part or the fifth part is stopped. B9.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the following effects are exerted. That is, when predetermined music is output using at least a part of data of the first data to the sixth data, when the predetermined music is reproduced to the end by the part of data, from the beginning again The audio reproduction control means performs loop reproduction in which predetermined music is reproduced. Then, when any of the second reproduction start means to the sixth reproduction start means becomes to reproduce the predetermined music from the beginning after the predetermined effect becomes the first state or the second state, It is configured to start reproduction of any of the second to sixth parts and to stop the output of the first part, the second part or the fifth part. As a result, as the predetermined effect becomes the first state and the second state, when the continuity of the predetermined music is not interrupted and the part of the sound played with the predetermined music is increased, the increase of the part is Since it is performed at the beginning of the loop, the player can listen to the increase of the part in a natural manner.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8 and B1 to B9,
The main control means
A determination unit that makes a determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
The gaming machine gives a predetermined gaming value to the player based on the determination result of the determination means, and
The predetermined effect is an effect that suggests that the player may be given a predetermined game value,
A game machine C1 characterized in that the first state and the second state indicate that an expectation of giving a predetermined game value to a player is improved.

  According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A8 and B1 to B9, the following effects are exerted. That is, the gaming machine is provided with a predetermined gaming value based on the result of the determination made by the determination means of the main control means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the predetermined effect is given to the player This is an effect that suggests that a predetermined game value may be provided. Then, the first state and the second state of the predetermined effect are states that indicate that the expectation of giving the predetermined game value to the player is improved. In such a first state and a second state, since the part of the sound played by the predetermined music is increased without interruption of the continuity of the predetermined music, the player can be determined without interrupting the feeling. There is an effect that the sense of expectation that the game value of the game is given can be improved also from the aspect of music.

In the gaming machine C1,
The effect executing means is
And a variation effect execution means for executing variation effects for dynamically displaying identification information based on the determination result of the determination means of the main control means.
The gaming machine provides a predetermined gaming value to the player when predetermined identification information is revealed in the fluctuation effect executed by the fluctuation effect executing means,
A game machine C2 characterized in that the predetermined effect is the fluctuation effect.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the variable effect execution means is included as the effect execution means, and the change effect for dynamically displaying the identification information is executed as a predetermined effect based on the determination result of the determination means of the main control means. The gaming machine gives a predetermined gaming value to the player when predetermined identification information appears in the fluctuation effect. As a result, the first state and the second state occur during the fluctuation effect, and the part of the sound played with the predetermined music is increased without interruption of the continuity of the predetermined music, so the player has interrupted the feeling. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the expectation from the predetermined gaming value being given in the fluctuation effect also from the aspect of the music without making any mistake.

In the gaming machine C2,
The predetermined effect is a change effect in which a pseudo stop display of identification information is performed during execution of the change effect, and a dynamic display of identification information is performed again,
A game machine C3 characterized in that the first state and the second state are the pseudo stop.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exerted. That is, the pseudo stop display of the identification information is performed in the middle of the execution of the change production, and the change production in which the dynamic display of the identification information is performed again is performed as a predetermined effect, and the pseudo stop display is in the first state Or it will be in the second state. Therefore, the part of the sound played with the predetermined music without interruption of the continuity of the predetermined music whenever the pseudo stop display of the identification information is performed while the predetermined music is output during the fluctuation effect Since the increase is realized, the combination of the pseudo stop display and the predetermined music can improve the expectation of the player to be given the predetermined game value without interrupting the feeling. There is.

In the gaming machine C1,
The effect executing means is
And a variation effect execution unit that executes variation effects for dynamically displaying a plurality of identification information based on the determination result of the determination unit of the main control unit.
The gaming machine gives a predetermined gaming value to a player when a combination of predetermined identification information is revealed in the fluctuation effect executed by the fluctuation effect executing means,
The predetermined effect is the remaining identification in a state in which a part of the identification information is stopped and displayed and a part of the combination of the predetermined identification information appears in the change effect performed by the change effect executing means. A game machine C4 characterized in that the dynamic display of information is performed.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the fluctuation effect execution means is included as the effect execution means, and the fluctuation effect for dynamically displaying the plurality of identification information is executed based on the determination result of the determination means of the main control means. The gaming machine gives a predetermined gaming value to the player when a combination of predetermined identification information appears in the variation effect. Then, in the change effect executed by the change effect executing means as the predetermined effect, the remaining identification information is displayed in a state in which a part of the identification information is stopped and displayed and a part of the predetermined identification information combination appears There is an effect that dynamic display of is performed. Thereby, when the dynamic display of the remaining identification information is stopped and displayed, the combination of the predetermined identification information appears and the first state in the situation where the predetermined game value may be awarded. Since the second state occurs and the part of the sound played by the predetermined music increases without interruption of the continuity of the predetermined music, the player is given the predetermined gaming value without interrupting the feeling. This has the effect of being able to improve the sense of expectation for things even more strongly in terms of music.

In the gaming machine C1,
The effect executing means is
And a variation effect execution means for executing variation effects for dynamically displaying identification information based on the determination result of the determination means of the main control means.
The gaming machine provides a predetermined gaming value to the player when predetermined identification information is revealed in the fluctuation effect executed by the fluctuation effect executing means,
The predetermined effect is performed over a plurality of the variable effects,
In the first state and the second state, the start of the dynamic display of identification information in each of the plurality of fluctuation effects constituting the plurality of fluctuation effects, the stop display of the dynamic display of identification information, or the middle of the fluctuation effects A game machine C5 characterized by being produced.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the variable effect execution means is included as the effect execution means, and the change effect for dynamically displaying the identification information is executed based on the determination result of the determination means of the main control means. The gaming machine gives a predetermined gaming value to the player when predetermined identification information appears in the fluctuation effect. Then, in a plurality of fluctuation effects where predetermined effects are performed over a plurality of fluctuation effects, and the predetermined effects are performed, start of dynamic display of identification information in each fluctuation effect, stop display of dynamic display of identification information, Alternatively, the first state and the second state occur in the middle of the fluctuation effect. As a result, since the part of the sound played with the predetermined music is increased without interruption of the continuity of the predetermined music over the plurality of fluctuation effects, the player can change the emotion of the plurality without changing the feeling. There is an effect that it is possible to increase the sense of expectation that a predetermined game value will be given after the event is performed from the aspect of music.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8 and B1 to B9,
The main control means
A determination unit that makes a determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
The gaming machine gives a predetermined gaming value to the player based on the determination result of the determination means, and
The main control means gives a probability of giving the predetermined gaming value to the player based on the determination result of the determination means when a specific condition is satisfied after giving the predetermined gaming value to the player. Having means for setting high probability or low probability,
The predetermined effect is an effect to be executed when the probability is set to a high probability after the player is given the predetermined game value.
A game machine C6 characterized in that the first state occurs after a predetermined period has elapsed since the player was given the predetermined game value.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A8 and B1 to B9, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the present gaming machine, the predetermined gaming value is awarded based on the result of the determination made by the determination means of the main control means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and the predetermined gaming value is given to the player. After being granted, when a specific condition is satisfied, the probability of giving a predetermined gaming value to the player is set to a high probability or a low probability based on the determination result of the determination means. The predetermined effect is an effect to be executed when the probability is set to a high probability after giving the predetermined game value to the player, and the first state is a predetermined state of game value to the player It is configured to occur after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the application. As a result, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the predetermined gaming value is awarded, the player can continue the predetermined music if the part of the sound played with the predetermined music increases without interruption. Since the fact that the probability of giving the gaming value is set to the high probability can be known without warning, it is possible to increase the joy due to the probability being set to the high probability.

In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8 and B1 to B9,
A display device which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner;
Number setting means for setting the number based on detection of acceptance of gaming media;
And a starting operation means that can be operated by the player to start the variable display of the identification information on the condition that the number of times is set by the number setting means.
Due to the operation of the operation means for stop or when a predetermined time elapses, the fluctuation display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and it is necessary that the combination of the identification information at the time of stop is a specific one As a condition, it generates a special game that gives the player a predetermined game value,
The predetermined effect is performed over a plurality of the variable displays,
A game machine D1 characterized in that the first state and the second state are generated in the middle of start, stop, or variable display of each of the variable effects constituting the plurality of variable displays.

  According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines A1 to A8 and B1 to B9, the following effects are exerted. That is, there is provided a display device which displays the identification information after the variable display of the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information. Then, on the condition that the number of hooks is set by the number-of-hooks setting means based on detection of acceptance of gaming media, when the player operates the starting operation means, fluctuation display of identification information is started. Ru. After that, the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or when a predetermined time elapses, and the combination of the identification information at the time of stopping is a specific one. As a necessary condition, a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated. Here, the predetermined effect is performed over a plurality of variable displays, and the first state and the second state occur in the middle of the start, stop, or the variable display of each of the variable effects constituting the plurality of variable displays. Is configured. As a result, since the part of the sound played with the predetermined music increases without interruption of the continuity of the predetermined music over the plurality of variable displays, the player performs the variable display without interrupting the feeling. Each time it is done, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the sense of expectation that a predetermined game value is given from the aspect of music.

In the gaming machine D1,
A game machine D2 characterized in that the first state and the second state are triggered by an operation performed by a player.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the first state and the second state are generated when the player performs the operation over the plurality of variable displays, when the player performs the operation, the continuity of the predetermined music is not interrupted. , The part of the sound played with the predetermined music increases. Therefore, every time the player operates the gaming machine over a plurality of variable displays without interrupting the feeling, the expectation that the predetermined gaming value is given may be enhanced in terms of music. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine D2,
A game machine D3 characterized in that the first state and the second state are triggered by the operation of the starting operation means.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the first state and the second state are generated in response to the player operating the starting operation means over the plurality of variable displays, the starting operation means for the player to start the variable display Each time the player operates the music piece, the part of the sound played with the predetermined music increases without interruption of the continuity of the predetermined music. Therefore, every time the player operates the starting operation means over the plurality of variable displays without interrupting the feeling, the player is expected to feel a predetermined gaming value is given by the variable display which is started, It has the effect that it can be enhanced in terms of music.

In the gaming machine D2 or D3,
A game machine D4 characterized in that the first state and the second state are triggered by the operation of the stopping operation means.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D2 or D3, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the first state and the second state are generated when the player performs the operation of the stop operation means over the plurality of variable displays, the player performs the stop operation to display the variable display. Each time the device is operated, the part of the sound played by the predetermined music increases without interruption of the continuity of the predetermined music. Therefore, every time the player operates the stop operation means over a plurality of fluctuation effects without interrupting the feeling, the player is expected to be given a predetermined gaming value in the fluctuation display displayed this time. There is an effect that it is possible to increase expectation from the aspect of music that a predetermined game value is given in the variable display to be performed next.

In any of the gaming machines D2 to D4,
A game machine D5 characterized in that the first state and the second state are triggered by an operation performed by the player for setting the number of multiplications by the number-of-charges setting means.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines D2 to D4, the following effects are exerted. That is, since the first state and the second state occur when the player performs an operation for setting the multiplication number by the multiplication number setting unit over a plurality of variable displays, every time the multiplication number is set In addition, the part of the sound played with the predetermined music is increased without interruption of the continuity of the predetermined music. Therefore, every time the player sets the number of times over a plurality of fluctuation effects without interrupting the feeling, the expectation of the predetermined game value being given in the fluctuation display to be performed from now on is that of the music There is an effect that it can be enhanced from the side.

In the gaming machine D1,
Procedure determining means for determining an operating procedure of the stopping operation means;
When the player operates the stop operation means according to the operation procedure determined by the procedure determination means, the variable display of the identification information is performed such that the combination of the identification information to be stopped is specified. A means for confirming display,
Notifying means for notifying the player of the operation procedure determined by the procedure determining means over a specific period when the second condition is satisfied;
An extension determining unit that determines whether to extend the specific period;
The predetermined effect is performed when the determination by the extension determination means is performed,
A game machine D6 characterized in that the first state and the second state are generated when the determination result by the extension determination means is shown to the player.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exerted. That is, the procedure determining means determines the operating procedure of the stopping operation means, and when the player operates the stopping operation means according to the determined operating procedure, the combination of identification information to be displayed in a stopped state is specified. The variable display of the identification information is displayed in a definite manner so as to become one. Further, when the second condition is satisfied, the notification means notifies the player of the operation procedure determined by the procedure determination means over the specific period. The player can set the combination of the identification information to be stopped and displayed to a specific one by operating the stop operation means according to the operation procedure notified by the notification means. That is, the specific period is a period advantageous to the player. Furthermore, the specific period is extended based on the determination by the extension determining means. The predetermined effect is performed when the determination by the extension determination means is performed, and the first state and the second state occur when the determination result by the extension determination means is shown to the player. As a result, when the determination by the extension determination means is performed in the specific period, the player can increase the number of parts of the sound played with the predetermined music without interrupting the continuity of the predetermined music. There is an effect that it is possible to enhance the interest in the game by showing the presence or absence of the extension of the specific period without interrupting the feeling.

In the gaming machine D6,
A game machine D7 characterized in that the first state and the second state occur as a result of determination by the extension determination means that indicates to a player that a specific period is to be extended.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6, the following effects are exerted. That is, in the predetermined effect, the first state and the second state occur when it is shown to the player that the specific period is extended as the determination result by the extension determination means. As a result, when the extension period is determined as a result of the determination by the extension determination means in the specific period, the part of the sound played with the predetermined music is continuous without interruption of the continuity of the predetermined music. Since the number of players increases, the player has the effect of being able to enhance the interest in the game due to the extension of the specific period without interrupting the feeling.

Perform effects based on the progress of the game based on control by the main control means that performs main control of the game, a sub control means that operates based on a signal transmitted from the main control means, and the sub control means In a gaming machine comprising: an effect executing means; and an audio output means for outputting an audio based on control by the sub-control means,
The sub-control means
Voice output control means for controlling the output of voice from the voice output means;
Storage means for storing audio data to be output by the audio output means, which is referred to by the audio output control means;
The audio data stored in the storage means includes predetermined music data for outputting predetermined music from the audio output means,
As the predetermined music data, a plurality of data corresponding to a plurality of patterns in which basic melody is unified are prepared.
The voice output control means
Selecting means for selecting one of the plurality of patterns each time the predetermined music is output in the predetermined music when the predetermined music is output from the voice output means;
And a reference means for referring to the data corresponding to the pattern selected by the selection means from the predetermined music data from the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine E1, main control of the game is executed by the main control means. Under the control of the sub control means operating based on the signal transmitted from the main control means, the effect executing means executes the effect based on the progress of the game. Further, under the control of the audio output control means provided in the sub control means, the audio is outputted from the audio output means. Audio data to be output by the audio output means, which is referred to by the audio output control means, is stored in the storage means, and for the audio data, predetermined music for outputting predetermined music from the audio output means Contains data. Then, as the predetermined music data, a plurality of data corresponding to a plurality of patterns in which basic melody is unified are prepared. Then, when a predetermined music is output from the audio output means, one of the plurality of patterns is selected by the selection means of the audio output control means each time the output of a predetermined section is performed in the predetermined music. The data corresponding to the selected pattern is referred from the storage means by the reference means from among the predetermined music data. As a result, when predetermined music is output, the pattern to be selected for each predetermined section is changed. Therefore, even if the predetermined music is output for a long time, the player is not bored and the newness is always updated. Has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine E1,
The selection means randomly selects one pattern out of the plurality of patterns whenever output of a predetermined section is performed in the predetermined music when the predetermined music is output from the sound output means. A game machine E2 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exerted. That is, when predetermined music is output from the audio output means, one of the plurality of patterns is randomly selected from the audio output control means whenever output of a predetermined section is performed in the predetermined music. Is selected by As a result, when a predetermined music is output, the pattern selected for each predetermined section is changed at random, so that even if the predetermined music is output for a long time, the predetermined music is always changing Can be played by the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can always feel newness without getting bored.

In the game machine E1 or E2,
When the predetermined music is outputted from the sound output means, the selection means outputs the predetermined music every time when the predetermined music area is outputted, based on the pattern selected in the immediately preceding period. A game machine E3 characterized by selecting a pattern of the next section from among the plurality of patterns.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the following effects are exerted. That is, when a predetermined music is output from the audio output means, every time the output of the predetermined section is performed in the predetermined music, the pattern of the next section is selected based on the pattern selected in the immediately preceding section. Is selected from a plurality of patterns. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to select a pattern in which the rhythm, backing, and the like greatly differ in adjacent sections, so that it is possible to make the player listen to the predetermined music without discomfort.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3,
The main control means
It comprises a determination means for making a determination based on the gaming state set in the gaming machine, triggered by the establishment of the predetermined condition,
The gaming machine gives a predetermined gaming value to the player based on the determination result of the determination means, and
When the predetermined means outputs the predetermined music from the voice output means, the selection means selects one of the plurality of patterns based on the gaming state each time a predetermined section of the predetermined music is outputted. A game machine E4 characterized by selecting a pattern of 1.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, this game machine is judged by the judgment means of the main control means based on the game state set to the game machine triggered by the establishment of the predetermined condition, and a predetermined game value is awarded based on the judgment result. Be done. Then, when a predetermined music is output from the voice output means, one of the plurality of patterns is selected based on the gaming state set in the gaming machine each time the output of the predetermined section is performed in the predetermined music. Is selected by the selection means of the audio output control means. Thereby, when the predetermined music is output, the pattern is selected based on the gaming state in each predetermined section, so that the predetermined music according to the gaming state can be output. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player feel the gaming state set in the gaming machine from the predetermined music.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E4,
The main control means
A determination unit that makes a determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
The effect executing means is
The variation effect execution means includes a variation effect execution means for dynamically displaying identification information in a variation mode determined based on the determination result of the determination means of the main control means,
The gaming machine provides a predetermined gaming value to the player when predetermined identification information is revealed in the fluctuation effect executed by the fluctuation effect executing means,
When the selection means outputs the predetermined music from the sound output means, the fluctuation of the fluctuation effect performed by the fluctuation effect executing means every time an output of a predetermined section is performed in the predetermined music. A game machine E5 characterized in that one pattern is selected from the plurality of patterns based on an aspect.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in this gaming machine, determination is made by the determination means of the main control means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and in the variation mode determined based on the result of the determination, the variation effect causing the identification information to be dynamically displayed is variation effect It is executed by the executing means. The gaming machine gives a predetermined gaming value to the player when predetermined identification information appears in the fluctuation effect. Then, when predetermined music is output from the audio output means, each time the predetermined music output is performed in the predetermined music, a plurality of change effects of the change effect performed by the change effect execution means are generated. One of the patterns is selected by the selection means of the audio output control means. Thereby, when the predetermined music is output, the pattern is selected based on the fluctuation mode of the fluctuation effect to be executed every predetermined section, so that the predetermined music corresponding to the fluctuation mode of the fluctuation effect is output be able to. Therefore, since the predetermined music having a sense of unity can be output in the variation effect of 1, it is possible to make the player listen to the predetermined music without feeling uncomfortable.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E5,
The main control means
A determination unit that makes a determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
The gaming machine gives a predetermined gaming value to the player based on the determination result of the determination means, and
When the predetermined music is output from the sound output unit, the selection unit outputs the plurality of patterns based on the determination result of the determination unit every time a predetermined section of the predetermined music is output. A game machine E6 characterized by selecting one of the patterns from among the above.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game machine is determined by the determination means of the main control means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and a predetermined game value is awarded based on the result of the determination. Then, when a predetermined music is output from the audio output means, one of the plurality of patterns is one based on the determination result of the determination means each time the output of a predetermined section is performed in the predetermined music. It is selected by the selection means of the audio output control means. Thereby, when the predetermined music is output, the pattern is selected based on the determination result of the determination means in each predetermined section, and therefore the determination is made if the predetermined music tends to be output by the specific pattern. There is an effect that it is possible to enhance an expectation for the provision of a predetermined game value based on the determination result of the means.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E6,
The main control means
A determination unit that makes a determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
The gaming machine gives a predetermined gaming value to the player based on the determination result of the determination means, and
The predetermined game value is prepared in a plurality of types based on the determination result of the determination means,
The selection means is based on the type of predetermined gaming value to be provided to the player each time an output of a predetermined section is performed in the predetermined music when the predetermined music is output from the voice output means. The game machine E7, wherein one pattern is selected from the plurality of patterns.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines E1 to E6, the following effects are exerted. That is, the game machine is determined by the determination means of the main control means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and a predetermined game value is awarded based on the result of the determination. A plurality of types of predetermined game values are prepared based on the determination result of the determination means. Then, when predetermined music is output from the sound output means, a plurality of patterns are generated based on the type of predetermined gaming value to be provided to the player each time an output of a predetermined section is performed in the predetermined music. One of the patterns is selected by the selection means of the audio output control means. Thereby, when the predetermined music is output, the pattern is selected based on the type of the predetermined gaming value given to the player for each predetermined section, and therefore the player is used for the predetermined music From the pattern, it is possible to predict the type of the predetermined game value to be provided, and it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E7,
The main control means
A determination unit that makes a determination based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
The effect executing means is
The variation effect execution means includes a variation effect execution means for dynamically displaying identification information in a variation mode determined based on the determination result of the determination means of the main control means,
The gaming machine is
A predetermined gaming value is given to a player when predetermined identification information appears in the fluctuation effect executed by the fluctuation effect executing means,
It is configured to be able to stand by a predetermined number of times for the fluctuation effect executed by the fluctuation effect executing means,
The selection means, when outputting the predetermined music from the sound output means, is configured to give the player a predetermined time during the waiting period for the fluctuation effect, each time an output of a predetermined section is performed in the predetermined music. A game machine E8 characterized in that one pattern is selected from the plurality of patterns based on whether or not there is a thing that gives a game value of.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines E1 to E7, the following effects are exhibited. In this gaming machine, a determination is made by the determination means of the main control means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a variation effect that causes the identification information to be dynamically displayed in the variation mode determined based on the result of the determination Is executed by The gaming machine gives a predetermined gaming value to the player when predetermined identification information appears in the fluctuation effect. In addition, the fluctuation effect executed by the fluctuation effect executing means is configured to be able to stand by for a predetermined number of times. Then, when predetermined music is output from the sound output means, the predetermined game value is given to the player in the waiting variable effect whenever output of a predetermined section is performed in the predetermined music. One of the plurality of patterns is selected by the selection means of the audio output control means based on whether or not there is any. Thereby, when a predetermined music is output, if a specific pattern is selected well in each predetermined section, there is a thing that gives a predetermined game value to the player among the waiting variable effects. There is an effect that the player can be expected.

In the game machine E8,
When the selection means outputs the predetermined music from the voice output means, if there is any of the above-mentioned waiting effects for providing the predetermined game value to the player, the predetermined music Each time an output of a predetermined section is performed, one of the plurality of patterns is selected based on the number of times of waiting until the change effect to which the predetermined game value is provided. Game machine E9.

  According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E8, the following effects are exerted. That is, when a predetermined music is output from the sound output means, if there is a thing which gives a predetermined gaming value to the player among the waiting variable effects, an output of a predetermined section is performed in the predetermined music. Each time one of the plurality of patterns is selected by the selection unit of the sound output control unit, based on the number of times of waiting until the fluctuation effect in which the predetermined game value is provided. Thereby, when predetermined music is output, it is possible to give the player an interval at which the execution of the fluctuation effect to which the predetermined game value is provided approaches, based on the pattern selected for each predetermined section. It has the effect of

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E9,
A game machine E10 characterized in that the predetermined section for which a pattern is selected by the selection means is one bar of the predetermined music.

  According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines E1 to E9, the pattern is selected by the selection means for each one bar of the predetermined music, so that the pattern can be finely changed, and the predetermined music Has the effect of being able to listen to

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E9,
A game machine E11 characterized in that the predetermined section for which a pattern is selected by the selection means is a plurality of bars of the predetermined music.

  According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines E1 to E9, the pattern is selected by the selection means for each of a plurality of bars of predetermined music. It has the effect of being able to listen to people.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E9,
The predetermined music is a group of predetermined bars repeatedly output,
A game machine E12 characterized in that the predetermined section in which a pattern is selected by the selection means is a group of the predetermined bars.

  According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines E1 to E9, the pattern is selected by the selection means for each group of predetermined bars repeatedly output as predetermined music, so the same pattern There is an effect that the player can listen to the music for a certain period of time. In addition, since the pattern is not changed during the grouping of the predetermined bars which are repeatedly output, it is possible to make the player listen to the predetermined music without discomfort.

  A gaming machine F1 characterized in that in any one of gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E12, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  A gaming machine F2 characterized in that in any one of gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, and E1 to E12, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  In any one of gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B9, C1 to C6, D1 to D7, E1 to E12, the gaming machine is characterized in that a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine are merged. Machine F3. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (effect execution means, variation effect execution means)
110 Main control unit (main control means)
113 Voice lamp control device (sub control means, voice output control means)
114 Display control device (sub control means)
223c Regeneration time counter (counting means)
226 Audio output device (audio output means)
306 Voice data ROM (storage means)
306a Reach BGM data (voice data)
306a1 Basic part data (first data)
306a2 Upper musical instrument part data (second data)
306a3 Song part data (third data)
306a4 First data (first data)
306a5 Second data (second data, fifth data)
306a6 Third data (third data, fourth data, fifth data, sixth data)
306b Normal BGM data (voice data)
S1207 Variation start process (determination means)
S2305 to S2311 (first means)
S2306 (Reproduction start means)
S2307 (Mute means)
S2309, S2311 (Mute release means)
S2317 (Selection means)
S2318 (Reference method)
S2331 to S2336 (first means)
S2331 (Reproduction start means)
S2332, S2333, S2336 (Mute means)
S2334, S2336 (Mute release means)
S2341 to S2344 (first means)
S2341 (Reproduction start means)
S2343 (second reproduction start means)
S2344 (3rd regeneration start means)

Claims (1)

Perform effects based on the progress of the game based on control by the main control means that performs main control of the game, a sub control means that operates based on a signal transmitted from the main control means, and the sub control means In a gaming machine comprising: an effect executing means; and an audio output means for outputting an audio based on control by the sub-control means,
The sub-control means
An audio output control means for controlling the output of the audio from the audio output means;
The voice output control means is
And a first means for controlling to output predetermined music from the voice output means when the predetermined effect is executed by the effect execution means.
The first means is
When the predetermined effect is in the first state, control is performed to increase the part of the sound played by the predetermined music while maintaining the melody played by the predetermined music. Gaming machine.

Images